Turbo Floor Plan

Users Guide
TurboFloorPlan
TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

2013 TurboFloorPlan is a trademark of IMSI/Design. All rights reserved. Encore Software, Inc. 2013 Punch! Software, the Punch! Software logo, NexGen, PlantFinder, PhotoView, ClearView, Cabinet Assistant, Roofing Assistant, Decorator Palette, IntelliDeck, Site Planner, Material Importer, QuickStart, LogiCursor, AutoFraming, Framing Editor, Fireplace Assistant, Precision Lighting Planner, Global Sun Positioning, Plant Importer, RealModel, Object Organizer, and 3D Custom Workshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Encore Software, Inc. Google SketchUp is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. RealModel technology is protected by U.S. Patent No. 6,404,424. This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under the terms of the license agreement contained herein. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Encore Software, Inc. The information in this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Encore Software, Inc. assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. First edition, 2013
Table of Contents
Part 1: Nuts & Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Contents of Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Installing TurboFloorPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Adding 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the ProjecTape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objects Preview Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plants Preview Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plant Inventory Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Hardiness Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlantFinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Plants Grow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Wall Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Paint and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Custom Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Building Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the SmartWand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with QuickPalettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Visual Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizing 3D Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 25 26 27 27 28 29 29 29 30 31 31 31 32 32 34 35 36
A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Floor Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text & Dimension Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8
Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
................................................ Adding and Modifying Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Door Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 39 39 40 40 41
Finding Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Integrated Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Tips & Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Training Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Important System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 13 13 14
Part 2: Menu Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting a New File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Sample Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the 20 Pre-Drawn Home Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Floor Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a 3D View Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
45 45 46 46 46 47 47 50 51 52
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Viewing the 2D Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming In and Out in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Across the 2D Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size . . . . . . . Customizing Visible Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Build Green Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the 3D Cutaway Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Viewpoint Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Features in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 17 18 18 18 19 20 21 22 22 23
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 54 54 54
Contents
Rotating a Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flip and Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning to Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy To Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move To Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Entire Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Entire Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55 55 56 56 57 58 58 58
Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting the Working Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Ceiling Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lot Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Topography Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work on Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work on Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planting Age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plant Growth Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Plant Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import a Floor Plan Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Match the Drawing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace the Imported Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Hide an Imported Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 59 60 60 61 61 61 62 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 65
Saving a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizing Saved 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to Construct a RealModel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing RealModel Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constructing Wall Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constructing Roof Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Template Materials and Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model . .
85 85 86 86 87 87 87 88 88 88
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Working with 2D and 3D Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Integrated Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Training Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Product Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About TurboFloorPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 91 91 92 92 92
Part 3: From the Ground Up . . . . . . . . 93

QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Launching QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting QuickStart Render Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Sample Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 95 96 96 96 97 97
2D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
View the 2D Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom In and Out in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fit Your Design to Your Current Window Size . . . . . . . . . . Customize Visible Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoSnap Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Topography Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Virtual Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 68 68 68 69 70 71 71 73 73 73
Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Adding Stiffener Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Adding Foundation Piers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Adding Post Tension Strands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Drawing the Foundation Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Working with 2D and 3D Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving around in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Animation Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Previewing Animation Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Animation Path 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Animation Path Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Path Curvatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming and Prioritizing Animation Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Decorator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator Palette Managing Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Decorator Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizing Decorator Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Within the Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 76 78 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 84 84 84 85
Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Drawing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Wall Segment Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Wall Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Ceiling/Floor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Gable Wall Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Irregular Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Wall Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Room Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Room Addition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breaking a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Doors and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Door Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Door Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Double Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 101 102 103 103 105 105 106 106 106 106 107 108 108 109 109
ii TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Contents
Adding Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Window Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stacking Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudging Wall Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Second Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Split Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Staircase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Staircase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Floor Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Cabinet Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Rooms Using Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112 112 113 113 114 114 114 115 115 116 116 116
Placing Baseboard Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating to a Floors Base or Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141 141 142 142
Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Adding a Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracing an Exterior Wall Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Deck Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Skirt Trim Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Handrail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Step Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Custom Staircase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Custom Staircase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Custom Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Custom Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating Objects to a Decks Base or Surface . . . . . . . . . . 145 145 146 147 147 147 148 148 149 149 149 149
Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Defining the Property Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Ground Fill Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Patio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Outdoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Cabinet Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edging an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Fences and Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Retaining Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing a Sprinkler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Topography Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excavating Topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 151 152 153 153 154 154 155 156 157 158 159 159 159
Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Placing Outlets and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Connector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fixture Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Flood Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Ceiling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Phone and Cable Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Battery Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating to a floors base or surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudging Wall Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 120 120 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 124
Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Floor Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Bathtubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Hot Water Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 128 128 128 128 129 129
Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Drawing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Rectangles and Squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Circles and Ovals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Circular Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Multigons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Curve Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Rules and Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Details to Intelligent Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 161 161 162 162 162 163 163 163 164 164 165 165
Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Freehand Roof Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Dormer Cutout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Dormer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Gambrel Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Saltbox Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 132 133 133 134 135 135 136
Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Customizing Wall Framing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Framing Beam Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Joist Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Support Column Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Rafter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Deck Framing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 167 168 168 169 169 169
HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Placing Air Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Placing Vents and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps . . . . . 140
iii
Contents
Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Designing Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Fence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freehand Detail Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Fence Materials and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Fence Designer Images in Your Project . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 171 173 176 177 177 177
Part 4: Enhancement & Customization PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

PhotoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tips for Using PhotoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altering PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landscaping Using PhotoView Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right in Your Own Backyard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 181 182 182 183 183 183 184
Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Launching Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Construction Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Various Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Master Pricelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Pricelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a Pricelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 186 186 186 186 187 187 188
Drawing a 2D Closed Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Circular Closed Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Closed Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Open Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Open Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Circular Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Hollow Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Curve Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing from Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing from Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosing an Open Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extruding a 2D Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revolving a 2D Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoothing a Revolving Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Points within an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Object Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Point Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding and Removing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracing an Imported Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Default Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Paint and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Colors or Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200 201 201 202 202 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 206 206 206 207 207 208 208 208 208 209 210 211 212 213
Drawing 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Drawing a 3D Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Multigon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Closed Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Circular Closed Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Closed Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Open Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Open Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Circular Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 3D Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Hollow Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosing an Open Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Object Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Point Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing from Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing from Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Default Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Paint and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Application of Color or Material . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Decorator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Colors or Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 215 216 217 217 218 218 219 219 220 221 221 221 222 222 222 223 223 223 225 225 227 229 229
Part 5: 3D Custom Workshop . . . . . . 189

Before You Draw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Opening a New File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening an Existing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing 3DS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing on the Front Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing on the Floor Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing on the Side Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Nudge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 191 191 192 192 193 194 194 194 194 195 196 196 197
Drawing 2D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Drawing a 2D Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Multigon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a 2D Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 199 200 200
Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Applying Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Object Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 231 232 233
iv TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Contents
Grouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking Objects in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Nudge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Points within an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233 233 234 234 235 236 236 237 237 238
Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Using Perspective or Orthographic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Different Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting your Wireframe as your Default View . . . . . . . . . . Using Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Camera Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Default Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Fly-Around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Curve Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Nudge and the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 239 241 241 241 242 243 244 244 245 245
Contents
vi TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
vii
Contents
viii TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Part 1
Nuts & Bolts

TurboFloorPlan uses several concepts throughout the home design program and various PowerTools. This section contains basic concepts from saving and printing files to viewing angles, plan tab controls, and so on.
Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7:
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Finding Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adding 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Chapter 1
Welcome
TurboFloorPlan is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who needs fast, accurate home drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D. Uses for TurboFloorPlan include:

Contents of Package
TurboFloorPlan comes with everything you need to install and use the software. The package includes the following items:
TurboFloorPlan Installation DVD
System Requirements
In order to run TurboFloorPlan, it is recommended that you have a Pentium-based computer. In addition, your system should include the following: System Requirements
Architectural drawings Presentations Deck design 3D visualization DXF/DWG Import and Export Electrical plans Framing customization Interior design Landscaping
Intel Pentium, Celeron, Xeon, or Centrino or AMD Athlon, Duron, or Opteron Processor Windows XP or higher 64 MB of RAM 3.8 GB of hard disk space VGA video card displaying at least 1024x768 with 32bit color DVD-ROM drive Mouse or other pointing device 32 MB Video Card Memory
Its simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual, so youll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see A Quick Tour, which begins on page 5 for an overview of the screen layout and a quick tour of the program. For a basic overview of tools and techniques that youll use throughout the design process, see Menu Bars, which begins on page 43.
Installing TurboFloorPlan
To install TurboFloorPlan, you must run Setup. You cant install or reconfigure TurboFloorPlan by copying files directly from the distribution DVD to your hard drive. To install TurboFloorPlan 1 Insert TurboFloorPlan Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Installation begins as soon as you insert the DVD. 2 Follow the installation prompts that appear. Note: If installation did not begin when you inserted the TurboFloorPlan Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive, Autorun may be turned off on your computer.
The most important thing to do before beginning work with TurboFloorPlan will be setting your display to 32-bit color. To do this, right-click the Desktop, then click Properties on the pop-up menu. Click the Settings Tab on the Display Properties dialog box, then select True Color (32-bit).
Chapter
Welcome
To install TurboFloorPlan if installation does not begin automatically 1 Insert TurboFloorPlan Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. 2 Double-click My Computer. 3 Double-click the DVD-ROM drive (most computers will begin the installation at this point). 4 Double-click SETUP.
4 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Chapter 2
menu bar plan tab text & dimension tools Animator edit toolbar design window 3D Quarter View plant inventory bar
working floor button elevation bar
plan toolbar
green info
Training Center view icons tool options preview bar
viewpoint icon
status bar
A Quick Tour
To get the most benefit from TurboFloorPlan, you should take a minute to become familiar with the layout of the drawing space, plan tabs, and toolbars. In most cases, detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items is not provided here. For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the Control menu, the window border, the maximize button, dialog box controls, and so on, refer to Windows online Help.
Title Bar
The title bar extends across the top of the application window. It displays the name of the program and the name of the current drawing file. Using the buttons at the right end of the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close, or restore the window. You can also maximize or restore a window by double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. If the application is running in a window, rather than maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window on the desktop.
Menu Bar
You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display cascading menus, when you place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a menu item, a description is displayed on the Status Bar. To use the keyboard, press ALT and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the
Chapter
A Quick Tour
menu items name. If there is a cascading menu, you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. Pressing ESC backs out of the menu items one level at a time. There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available shortcut keys to the right of the items name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.
Elevation Bar
With TurboFloorPlans Elevation Bar you can easily place the selected item(s) to any level, including those that you have previously drawn. In addition to making sure windows, doors, and other features are place at the correct elevation, you can easily place objects relative to previously-drawn entities. For example, placing a lamp on a table. For more information, see Elevation Bar, on page 56.
Plan Tabs
TurboFloorPlan utilizes a collection of layers, which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top and right side of the design window. Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools that you can use to design your floor plan; for example, clicking the Electrical Tab accesses outlets, switches, and ceiling fans, while clicking the Landscaping Tab accesses tools for edging, fencing, ground fill, excavation, and so on. Once placed, each feature such as a door, window, plant, outlet, and so on, can be altered at any time. Click the feature and the Tool Options is brought to the top (a default that can be changed) and displays the customizable properties of that feature. You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can make each plan layer a different color, so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even move features to a different plan, when necessary. In addition, by controlling which plan tabs are visible at any time, you are also controlling which layer(s) will be printed. For example, if you just want to print your electrical plan, you can turn off all other layers and just print that one.
Measurement Tools
The measurement tools, available from the 2D Menu, include associative dimensions, window/door callouts and cursor dimensions. Associative Dimensioning are the measurements that appear as you are adding features. For example, the Associative Dimensioning feature will show how far from the ends of each wall the window is positioned. When the Window/Door Callouts option is checked, the measurements of all window and door openings will be shown, with the wall measurements, and be displayed in the floor plan view. Cursor Dimensions show exactly where your cursor is located, making it easy to place lighting a precise distance from a wall, for example. For more information on these and other measurement tools, see Dimensioning, on page 71.
Selecting a Plan Tab

Using the easily-accessible plan tabs, you can quickly access each tool set at any time. To select a plan tab 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
View Icons
When you load TurboFloorPlan, you will be working in 2D Full Plan View. This allows you to quickly draw walls, add doors and windows, and so on.
Working Floor Button

Use the Working Floor button to switch the current view, based on the number of floors in your home plan. When you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu is displayed. Simply click the floor on which you would like to work to switch the current working floor.
Edit Toolbar
Chamfer Corner - adds a chamfer (straight) corner to your topography, patio, roof panel, railing, and so on. ProjecTape - sets points at specified distances from walls, fences, objects, and so on. Visual Array Tool - place a line of plants or objects at exact distances from each other. If you want more design space, you can hide the Edit Toolbar. On the Window Menu, uncheck Edit Toolbar Visible. When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions, while maintaining a clear view of the 3D design, select Quarter 3D View or Split 2D/3D View. Then, when youre ready to add materials and colors to your dream home it will be easier in Full 3D View mode or Elevation View. As you move on to building a scale model of your design, RealModel View provides the pieces you will need. For information or recommendations on using environmentally-friendly alternatives, click the Build Green icon. For a full explanation of the view options, see the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 17.
Text & Dimension Toolbar

Less frequently-used tools are located on the collapsible Text & Dimension Toolbar. Access them by clicking the arrow next to the active icon.
Edit Toolbar
Tools that you will use most frequently are located on the Edit Toolbar. From top to bottom they are: Selection Tool, Resize Segment Tool, Rotate Tool, Zoom Tool, Pan Tool, ProjecTape, and Visual Array Tool. Selection Tool - use to click any object, wall, plant, and so on, to activate it. Resize Segment Tool - precisely update the length of an individual, previously-drawn wall, stairway, railing, and so on. Rotate Tool - freely rotate the selection, or specify the exact amount of rotation. Zoom Tool - get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. Pan Tool - moves the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view. Insert Point - adds a point where you click. Remove Point - deletes the point where you click. Fillet Corner - adds a fillet (curved) corner to your topography, patio, roof panel, railing, and so on.
Multi-Line Text - add important information to your drawing. For example, add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan. Rotated Text - place text at any angle needed. Dimension Wall Spacing - especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. Zero-Offset Dimension - a universal dimension tool that lets you add dimensions anywhere, even at an angle. Offset Dimension - determines the horizontal or vertical distance (rise or run) between two points, helpful when measuring an angled segment. Length Dimension - allows you to measure the distance of a single segment by selecting the two endpoints, the dimension is positioned offset from the segment.
Chapter
A Quick Tour
Diameter Dimension - measure the diameter of a circle by dragging along the circles perimeter, automatically detects the opposite edge and displays the dimension in the middle of the circle. Leader Dimension - annotate your workspace by positioning a single arrow and leader line between two objects, for example, when associating text with a 2D object.
Tool Options
You can easily modify features you have previously drawn by selecting them and editing their Tool Options. You can even set Tool Options to automatically display when a feature is selected, by clicking Auto Activate. Tool Options are easily accessed by clicking a feature on your floor plan. For example, clicking a door accesses the customizable properties for doors and clicking a plant accesses the properties for plants. To set Tool Options 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want to customize. Tool Options are displayed. Note: If Tool Options does not automatically display, reset it by checking Auto Display Tool Options on the Window menu.
Preview Bars
You can click and drag objects, templates, materials, colors, and so on, from their Preview Bars onto your plan. The Preview Bar changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if you click the Plant Bar, plant options will be displayed. If you cannot add a feature or material, try adding it to a different view. For example, you cannot add paint in the 2D view and you cannot add furniture or plants to 3D View.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located in the lower left of the window and displays prompts, program messages, and measurements. It is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over certain buttons or menu items to find their function.
Chapter 3
Finding Answers
TurboFloorPlan is not just one software application, but several applications that can be used together. TurboFloorPlan provides you with a number of sources you can use to familiarize yourself with these applications. When you have questions about a specific feature or procedure, this manual and the integrated Help system, that you can access from the program, provide a comprehensive guide to all of the tools in TurboFloorPlan. The video tutorials that are accessible from the Help menu, on the other hand, are an excellent way to learn about the way real projects are constructed from the ground up. Also discussed here are ways to access technical support and the TurboFloorPlan website.
Click
Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once.

Right-click
Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once.

Double-click
Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice.

Click and drag
Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving the mouse, simultaneously.
Drag-and-drop
Clicking to select an item, holding down the mouse button, then dragging and releasing.
Scroll
Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window by clicking the slider box, holding down the mouse button and dragging. Graphic Cues This guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some show the window or a dialog box that will appear during an operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used, every effort is made to show the element exactly as it is displayed on the window.
About This Guide

The text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you find the information you need quickly and get the most out of TurboFloorPlan. Each section of this guide is divided into a series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if necessary. Instructions for installing and using Microsoft Windows do not appear in this guide. If youre uncomfortable with your knowledge of Windows or with the concepts associated with a user interface object, you should review Windows online Help before attempting any serious work with TurboFloorPlan. Basic Terms The following is a list of terms used throughout this guide. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of basic terminology.
Keyboard commands are visually called out in a different font; for example, SHIFT and ENTER.
Graphic Cues Used in this Guide
Convention Meaning mouse click that selects a point the number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a series of clicks click and drag operation beginning of arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow indicates where to stop a right mouse click the number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a series of clicks
Integrated Help
TurboFloorPlan includes an extensive integrated help system. This system includes all of the information found in the TurboFloorPlan Users Guide.
Chapter
Finding Answers
To access the online help files
On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.
3 (optional) Click Back or Next to cycle through the tips available for that feature, object, or plant.
To access help for a specific part of your 2D drawing 1 Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with. The Quick Access menu for that feature, object, or plant is displayed on the right side of the window.
Training Center
You can get started easily with TurboFloorPlans Step-byStep Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the Training Center. Also available in the Training Center are videos showing exactly how most tools function. To access the video step-by-step tutorials 1 Click the Training Center button. The Training Center is displayed.
2 Click the tools Help listing on the pop-up window. Help for that feature, object, or plant is displayed. 3 (optional) Pressing F1, while many tools are active, will access the help file for that tool.
Tips & Tricks

TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to get started by providing users with tips and tricks for each tool. Tips & Tricks provide information about each tool and some general information about the program. To access tips & tricks for a part of your 2D drawing 1 Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with. The topics are displayed on the left side of the Training Center. You can choose to view the content by Category or Room. 2 Click a topic to display the cascading list of tutorials available.
2 Click the Tips & Tricks listing at the top of the pop-up window. The Tips & Tricks menu for that feature, object, or plant is displayed.
3 Click the topic you want and the tutorial video is displayed on the Design It tab. You can also open the corresponding tutorial drawing from the Other Tasks window, in the bottom left corner. 4 (optional) Click the Do It tab for detailed articles regarding your topic.
Technical Support
To access video tool tip tutorials 1 Click the Training Center button. The Training Center is displayed. 2 Click the Video Tutorial button on the Tips and Tricks menu. A short video will be played, showing how the tool works.
Technical Support
Before contacting TurboFloorPlan Technical Support, please verify that the answer to your question is not available from one of the following resources:

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide. TurboFloorPlan Help System. Tutorials provided in the Training Center. The TurboFloorPlan Online Community is available at forums.TurboFloorPlan.com. At the Online Community, users can post questions and trade useful tips and tricks. Technical and Customer Support is available by email at support@imsidesign.com
The Customer Support Center can only answer questions that are related to features of TurboFloorPlan. They cannot answer specific questions about home building, local building codes, and so on. When contacting the Support Center, please provide the following details:
Serial Number - located on the Help > About TurboFloorPlan dialog box. Your computers operating system. Make and model of your computer. Video card manufacturer and model. Video card driver date and version. Video RAM. Display settings, including hardware acceleration.
When you call, you should be in front of your computer, with the program running, and have the above information handy. The technical support contact information can be located at the Customer Support Center support@imsidesign.com.
11
Chapter
Finding Answers
Chapter 4
Before You Draw

To get the most benefit from TurboFloorPlan, you should take a minute to become familiar with some of its basic concepts. With TurboFloorPlan you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement, and set the reference grid. There are also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.
On the 2D Menu, click Render Options. The Render Options dialog box is displayed. The lower the render quality, the faster 3D View will render your design.
Display Settings
TurboFloorPlan is designed to run effectively, based on the system requirements printed on the software packaging. However, there are some specific settings you can select to obtain the best display possible. To adjust your display settings 1 On the Start menu, click Settings, Control Panel. The Control Panel program group is displayed. 2 Double-click Display. The Display Properties dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the Settings page tab. 4 In the Colors list box, click True Color (32-bit). 5 In the Screen Area section, move the slider to display at least 1024x768 pixels. 6 Click OK. The new window settings are applied. You may be prompted to restart your computer to apply the new settings. If so, click OK or Yes.
Important System Settings

Some of your computers settings can impact TurboFloorPlans efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these settings, you can control how the program performs.
Set your Display Settings to 1024x768 pixels and True Color (32-bit). On your Start menu, select Control Panel>Display>Settings. If you notice that the 3D display is not clear, reduce the Graphics Acceleration. On your Start menu, select Control Panel, then click System>Performance> Graphics, then set the acceleration back one notch. By default, all measurements display in English Units; to choose Metric Units go to Design>Unit of Measure... select Metric Units.
Setting the Units of Measurement

You can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened. To use English measurements 1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed. 2 Click English Units.
Speed Tips
You can Speed Up TurboFloorPlan by changing some of the program's settings.
Close the 3D View window when you are not working in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the 3D View window is closed. Turn off shadows. Hide floors that are not active. Turning off inactive floors means the program will not waste resources on them.
13
Chapter
Before You Draw
3 (optional) Click the arrow next to Angle Format and select the number of decimal points you want to use.
4 (optional) Click the arrow next to Precision and select the number of decimal points you want to use.
4 (optional) Click the arrow next to Readout Format and select the format you want.
5 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied. To set defaults for previous designs 1 Follow the instructions for either English or Metric units, outlined above, then click the box to set the defaults for all previously-drawn designs.
6 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied. To use Metric measurements 1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed. 2 Click Metric Units.
2 Click OK. The defaults will be applied to any previously-drawn design when it is opened.
Setting the Scale

Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can
Setting the Scale
customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale. To set the drawing scale 1 On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale dialog box is displayed.
2 Click a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.
15
Chapter
Before You Draw
Chapter 5
Viewing in 2D & 3D
TurboFloorPlan provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, in Elevation view, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view or using only TurboFloorPlan 3D View. When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction. 3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design. In this chapter, youll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.
To view all 2D floor plan views at once
Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View All Floors.
To view the working floor only
Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View Working Floor Only.
To view drawing layer combinations 1 Click a plan tab. 2 Click the arrow to the right of the tab label. A drop-down menu will appear. 3 Click the plan you want to view. 4 (optional) Repeat until the combination you want is reached.
Zooming In and Out in 2D

You can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom factor to obtain exact zoom precision. Once youve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous, full view with one mouse click. To zoom in
Viewing the 2D Plan

When initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, TurboFloorPlan organizes your floor plan into layers, which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time! To view the 2D plan only
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Zoom button. 2 Click on the design window and drag in an upward direction to zoom in. 3 Click on the design window and drag in a downward direction to zoom out. Note: When the mouse is clicked, the location of the cursor will be centered on the design window.
(optional) Zoom in and out easily with the wheel on your mouse.
On the View Toolbar, click the 2D Plan View icon, or on the Window menu, click Plan Full View. The 2D plan view is displayed.
To set the zoom factor 1 On the 2D Menu, click Set Plan View Zoom. The Set Plan View Zoom dialog box is displayed.
17
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
2 Type a new zoom factor, then click OK.
To hide a plan layer from view 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
To reset the 2D plan view
3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want hidden.
On the 2D Menu, click Reset Plan View . Your plan is reset to the original, default view. (optional) Press CTRL+E on your keyboard. Your plan is reset to the original, default view.
Panning Across the 2D Drawing

You can move the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view, by panning. Panning also makes it easy to slowly view areas of your drawing piece-bypiece. To pan in any direction 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Pan button. The pointer changes to reflect Pan mode. 2 Click on the design window and drag in the direction you want to view. The view changes, dynamically, as you move the mouse.
Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing. To view a plan layer 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear. 3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want to appear.
(optional) Hold down the wheel on your mouse, and move the mouse the direction you want to pan.
Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size

You can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan Tool or Zoom Tool. To fit your entire design within your window
Press CTRL+F or, on the 2D Menu, click Fit to Window. To customize the color of plan layer 1 On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors. The Screen Colors dialog box is displayed.
Customizing Visible Plans

During the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers. You can also assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D Menu.
Build Green Information
5 (optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the luminosity. Click OK. 6 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables. Click OK. 7 (optional) Type Red, Green, and Blue variables. Click OK. To assign a new color 1 On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors. The Screen Colors dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the preview box of the color you want to alter. The Color dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the plan color you want to change. The Color dialog box is displayed. OR 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to customize. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear. 3 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. Click OK. Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color. 4 (optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the luminosity. Click OK. 5 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables. Click OK. 6 (optional) Type Red, Green, and Blue variables. Click OK. 7 On the Screen Colors dialog box, click OK. To reset all colors 3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click Floor Plan Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors, then click Reset Colors. All colors will be reset to the default values.
Build Green Information

TurboFloorPlan includes information to help you with designing an energy-efficient, environmentally-minded home. Tips and information are available to help guide you as you are creating your design. To access the green information center
4 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. Click OK. Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color.
Click the Build Green button. The Green information Center window is displayed. Features that have additional information available, are highlighted with green in the design window. Click on a feature on your design window, to access information about that feature.
19
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
(alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Plan View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
To access green tips for features in your design 1 Click the Build Green button. Features in your drawing that have green information available are highlighted in green. 2 Click to select the feature in your drawing and the green information that is available is displayed in the Green Information Center window.
To display quarter 3D view

On the Window menu, click Quarter 3D View. (alternate) Click the Quarter 3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset. (alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Quarter 3D View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Working with 3D
TurboFloorPlan lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles. Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush! With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on. All 3D View window options are accessible from the rightclick plan options menu. To display plan view

To display a split 2D/3D view
Click the Split Plan/3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset. (alternate) On the Window menu, click Split Plan/3D View. (alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Split Plan/3D View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Click the Plan View icon. (alternate) On the Window menu, click 2D Plan View
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider
To display full 3D view
Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset. (alternate) On the Window menu, click 3D Full View. (alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
To refresh your 3D view
Press F5 or, on the 2D Menu, click Refresh.
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider

With TurboFloorPlans 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away layers of your floor plan, with ease. You can slice away layer after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture placement, and so on. If you find you want more viewing room in the 3D View window, you can hide the 3D Cutaway Slider at any time. To hide the 3D Cutaway Slider
On the 3D Menu, uncheck 3D Cutaway Slider Visible.
To display elevation view
Click the Elevation View icon from the collapsible view toolset. (alternate) On the Window menu, click Elevation View. (alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Elevation View from the pop-up menu that is displayed. To view a plan using the 3D Cutaway Slider 1 Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset. 2 Using the navigation tools, set the view that you would like to cut away. 3 On the 3D View window, click and drag the 3D Cutaway Slider up and down to see a cutaway view of your design.
21
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation > Right View.
Setting the Viewpoint Angle

TurboFloorPlan has four pre-set viewpoint angles and, from those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy. To set a viewpoint angle 1 Click the Full 3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
Note: By clicking the other three directions, you can view your floor plan from the other edges of your lot.
Selecting Features in 3D
With TurboFloorPlans 3D Selection Tool, you can click features on the 3D View window and they are automatically selected on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much easier. For example, you can easily select windows that may be stacked on top of each other in the 2D design view.
Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View
To use the 3D selection tool 1 Click the 3D Selection Tool. 2 On the 3D View window, click a feature to select it. That feature is activated on the design window and its properties are displayed on the Tool Options.
Note: The material being identified in this example is the placemat on the table. Note: To identify a plant, hold down CTRL, while clicking a plant on the 3D View window. Note: You can select features on the active floor only. If the feature you click does not become active, make sure it is on the active floor.
Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View

As you experiment with different colors and materials during the design process, you may want to identify a previouslyused material. This is easy with TurboFloorPlans Find Applied Tool. To use the find applied tool 1 Click the Find Applied Tool. 2 On the 3D View window, click the color or material that you want to identify. That color or material will be displayed in the Preview Bar.
23
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
Chapter 6
Adding 3D Features
TurboFloorPlan lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely unique. View all your customizations in the 3D View Window. By adding color, trim, and materials, you can make decorative changes to the 3D presentation of your home design as quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush!
Objects Preview Bar

TurboFloorPlan lets you add details to the 3D View presentation of your design using a variety of objects. Included in the library are 3D Objects, 2D Symbols, and Accessories. The Objects Preview Bar is accessible at any time and objects can be placed on any plan tab. The Accessories category is very large and includes drapes, blinds, curtains, shutters, and so on. An Accessory can only be placed on a wall segment. In addition, you can create your own filing system for the objects you create with 3D Custom Workshop or rearrange the objects to suit your needs. It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan drawing, objects appear as 2D symbols, while textures such as color, wallpaper, wainscoting, and so on, do not appear in 2D at all. To add 3D objects using drag-and-drop 1 Click Furniture. The Preview Bar displays design objects.
Using the ProjecTape

TurboFloorPlans ProjecTape helps position plants, furniture, retaining walls, and so on, exactly where you need them, the first time! Each of the four ends has a different colored dot; you can set these points to the exact place you need. 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the ProjecTape Tool. The ProjecTape Tool Options is displayed. 2 Click a point on your drawing to position the ProjecTape. Notice the distances from various surfaces update, as you drag. 3 (optional) On the ProjecTape Tool Options, enter a rotation angle in the dialog box, or click the buttons on each end, or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to set the angle you want. 4 (optional) On the ProjecTape Tool Options, click the radio button next to the colored dot you want to position, and enter a distance. 5 Use the laser lines as a reference to position the entity.
2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then select the needed object library from the menu.
3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Objects drop-down menu, then click another object library.
4 Scroll to view the available objects. 5 Click the object you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window.
25
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
6 (optional) Click the Selection Tool, then click the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window. To add 3D objects using import 1 On the File menu, click Import, then TurboFloorPlan Custom Workshop Object. 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 4 Click OK. The object will be imported and placed in the center of the design. 5 (optional) Click the Selection Tool, then click the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window. To add 2D symbols 1 Click the Objects Tab. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then select 2D Symbol Library from the menu.
5 (optional) Click the Selection Tool, then click the symbol you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window. To add log home components using drag-and-drop 1 Click the Objects Tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Objects drop-down menu, then click LogHome. 3 Scroll to view the available components. 4 Click the component you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window. 5 (optional) Click the Selection Tool, then click the component you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.
Plants Preview Bar

TurboFloorPlan includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the ones that grow best in your area of the country. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Symbols dropdown menu, then select exactly which type of Symbol you want to use. 2D Symbol options are displayed in the Preview Bar. To add plants 1 Click the Landscape plan tab. 2 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar displays available plants. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Plants dropdown menu to display the plant categories, then click to check the type of plants you want to place. 4 Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant selections in the Preview Bar. Note: Hold your cursor over the preview of the plant and that plants name will be displayed in the Status Bar. 5 On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window.
4 Click the symbol you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the symbol onto your design window.
Plant Inventory Bar
To edit plant details 1 Right-click the plant in the preview bar and choose Edit Details from the drop-down menu. The Plant Details dialog box is displayed. 2 Edit the details you want to change and then click OK.
Plant Inventory Bar

TurboFloorPlan keeps track of which plants you have used in your landscape. From this bar, you can easily find and/or replace all occurrences of each plant in your design. The Plant Inventory Bar shows all plants that are on the visible plan and on the active floor. To access the plant inventory bar
On the Design menu, click Show Plant Bar. The Plant Inventory Bar is displayed across the bottom of the design window.
To move a plant 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plant you want to move. 3 Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the plant to the new location. To customize the planting age 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plant you want to customize. 3 On the Plant Preview Bar, type the age of the plant at the time of planting. Note: Planting age can only be adjusted after a plant is placed. To identify which plant has been placed and view its info 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the design window, right-click the plant you want to identify, then click Plant Details on the pop-up menu.
To select all occurrences of a plant
On the Plant Inventory Bar, double-click a plant. All occurrences of that plant will be selected on the design.
To replace all occurrences of a plant
On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to use; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the plant you want to replace on the Plant Inventory Bar.
Viewing Hardiness Zones

TurboFloorPlan includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for the contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada, Europe, and Australia. All plants included in TurboFloorPlan can be sorted, using this information.
27
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
To view a hardiness zone map 1 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display available plants. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the TurboFloorPlan Library drop-down menu, then click the Hardiness Zone map you want to view.
3 Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then click OK. Note: Only the plants matching all the variables selected will be displayed in the Preview Bar. To broaden your search, check fewer boxes. 4 (optional) Click the View All buttons to select all options in a category. To locate a plant on the Preview Bar To hide the hardiness zone map

Click anywhere on the zone map.
PlantFinder
TurboFloorPlan includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a powerful sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that fit your particular criteria. To sort plants 1 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display available plants. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the TurboFloorPlan Library drop-down menu, then click PlantFinder. The PlantFinder dialog box is displayed.
On the design window, right-click the plant you want to locate, then click Locate Plant on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The plant will be selected and displayed on the Preview Bar. (optional) On the 3D Full View window, click the Find Applied Tool and CTRL+click the plant, in 3D. The plant will be selected and displayed on the Preview Bar.
To find a plant by name 1 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display available plants. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Plants Library drop-down menu, then click Search Plants. The Find Plant by Name dialog box is displayed.
Making Plants Grow
3 Type the botanical or common name of the plant, in the dialog box. 4 Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then click OK. A plant matching the criteria you specified will be displayed in the Preview Bar. Note: If you do not specify a category to be searched, TurboFloorPlan will search the Trees category by default. To view all plants
At the top of the Preview Bar, click the TurboFloorPlan Library drop-down menu, then click View All Plants.
Making Plants Grow

With TurboFloorPlan you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years. To grow your landscape 1 On the Window menu, open a 3D View window and position it to easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature. 2 Click the Landscape Tab. The Plant Growth Meter is displayed to the right of the plan tabs. 3 Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the Plant Growth Meter makes the plants appear younger, while pressing the larger tree, on the right, makes them appear older.
Applying Trims
It is easy to add base trim, crown molding, or library paneling for an elegant appearance or use wainscotting if you want to apply two different materials on one wall. You can also add case molding around doors and windows. All customizations are made on the 3D View window. In this example we will use Base Trim, but crown molding, door casings, library paneling, and wainscotting will be applied in exactly the same way. To apply base trim 1 Click the Trim Tab. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then select the needed trim library from the menu. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Trim drop-down menu, then select exactly what type of Base Trim you want to use. Base Trim options appear in the Preview Bar. 4 Click the trim you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the wall of your home in the 3D View window. The trim you selected is applied.
Note: The age is displayed in the Status Bar. Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see To customize the planting age, on page 27.
Removing Wall Trims

All wall trims are removed in the same way; drag and drop a no trim material onto the wall.
29
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
To remove wall trim 1 Click the Trim Tab. The Preview Bar will display available trims. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, drag & drop the first image, No Trim, onto the wall where you do not want trim to appear.
Applying Paint and Color

With TurboFloorPlan, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are just one example of what can be colorized; you can also apply color to furniture, window trim, doors, and so on. All customizations are made on the 3D View window. To make designing easier, you can create custom Decorator Palettes. For more information, see Using the Decorator Palette, which begins on page 83. To apply paint 1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available paint colors. 2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the available Paint Libraries. Click to select which one you want to use. The paint colors are displayed on the Preview Bar. 3 Scroll to view the available paint colors. 4 Click the paint color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The paint you selected is applied. Note: To customize a color, see To define a custom color, on page 31. 5 (optional) To view larger paint chips, click the Library drop-down menu at the top of the Preview Bar, as in Step 2 above, and then click Paint Chooser from the drop down menu. The Paint Chooser is displayed.
Note: The actual name of the paint is displayed, in the upper right, for ease in purchasing the correct color. To apply color from a customizable palette 1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available colors. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then select Custom Colors. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring or whichever category you prefer. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available Spring colors. 5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The color you selected is applied. Note: To customize a color, see To define a custom color, on page 31. To apply color from the color ramp 1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available colors. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then click Color Ramp. Twenty-five shades of the same color appear in the Preview Bar. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, drag the slider, below the color spectrum, to change the color family. 4 Scroll to view the variations of that color.
Using Custom Colors
5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The color you selected is applied.
7 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary. 8 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar.
Using Custom Colors

With TurboFloorPlan, you can define your own custom color with the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic colors available, then change its red, blue, or green values, or click on a color in the color spectrum window to mix your own color. In addition to customizing colors from the Preview Bar, you can add custom colors to your library. If you see a color you like, maybe a shade of green in the grass, or a fabric on a couch that is not currently available as a color, you can add that color to your library. By customizing colors, you are sure to find the exact color you want. To define a custom color 1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available colors. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then click Custom Colors. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Colors drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Summer. The Summer color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The Color dialog box is displayed.
Find Applied
After you have applied colors or materials, or after placing plants, you can easily identify which color, material, or plant has been used. To find an applied color or material 1 On the 3D Full View window, click the Find Applied Tool. 2 Click on the color or material you want to identify. The color or material is displayed in the Preview Bar. To identify a plant 1 On the 3D View window, click the Find Applied Tool. 2 Hold down CTRL and click on the plant you want to identify. The plant is displayed in the Preview Bar. To edit or create a new color 1 On the 3D View window, click the Find Applied Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click on the color you want to add. A dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to save the color to your Custom Colors library. Note: The color will replace the first color in the Gray Tones category.
Applying Building Materials

5 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color. 6 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color. With TurboFloorPlan, customizing the exterior of your home is a simple drag-and-drop procedure. Available materials include brick, stucco, gravel, roofing, and so on. You can create and import your own custom materials. For more information, see Importing Files, which begins on page 47.
31
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
You can even apply two different materials to a wall, using the Wainscotting feature. For more information, see Applying Trims, which begins on page 29. To apply material 1 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar will display available materials. 2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the Materials style menu, then click to check the material you want, for instance brick, stucco, stone, siding, and so on. Options of the selected material will be displayed on the Preview Bar. 3 Scroll to view the available materials. 4 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The material you selected is applied. Note: To increase the accuracy of applying materials, it may help to zoom in closer to what you are texturing. To apply custom materials 1 Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar will display available materials. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then select Custom Material Library from the menu. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Custom Materials Library drop-down menu, then select a library. The Preview Bar displays custom material options. 4 Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home, in the 3D View window. The custom material you selected is applied.
Using the SmartWand

You can easily apply the same material, paint or trim to multiple surfaces, by using SmartWand. It can be applied to walls, ceilings, doors, stairs, cabinets, and so on. We will use Paint in this example, but the steps for using SmartWand are the same, regardless of what you are applying. To use SmartWand 1 Click the Paint Tab. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library drop-down menu, then select the library which contains the paint you want to apply. The Preview Bar displays available colors. 3 Click the color you want to apply. 4 Click the wall you want to paint. A pop-up menu will display a list of available options.
5 Click the option you want. The paint you selected is applied. To enable SmartWand
On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click Enable SmartWand.
Working with QuickPalettes

As you draw, default colors and materials are applied to the surfaces in your drawing. With TurboFloorPlan you can control the default colors and materials that are applied using QuickPalettes. QuickPalettes are a collection of colors and materials that are designated for the surfaces in your drawing. When a QuickPalette is active, all of the surfaces are created using the colors and materials of that QuickPalette. You can also
Working with QuickPalettes
apply a QuickPalette to update the surfaces in your drawing all at once, allowing you to experiment with different looks and update entire rooms with just a few mouse clicks. There are two QuickPalettes already available for use: the Default QuickPalette and the Coastal QuickPalette. In addition to these pre-configured QuickPalettes, you can create your own custom QuickPalettes to use as you design. To access QuickPalettes
To apply a QuickPalette to a room 1 Click the Templates tab and choose QuickPalette Library from the Templates drop-down menu. The QuickPalettes are displayed in the Preview Bar. 2 Drag and drop a QuickPalette onto a surface where you want it applied. The SmartWand menu is displayed, with the option to apply the QuickPalette to only that surface, or to all of the surfaces in entire room.
On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed.
1 (alternate) Click the Templates tab and choose QuickPalette Library from the Templates drop-down menu. The QuickPalettes are displayed in the Preview Bar. By default, the Coastal and Default QuickPalettes exist; if you have created additional QuickPalettes, they are displayed as well. 2 Click the QuickPalette Library dropdown menu and choose Edit QuickPalettes. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Right-click a QuickPalette in the Preview Bar and choose Edit QuickPalettes.
3 Click to apply QuickPalette to the surface(s) you want. The design is updated based on the QuickPalette. Note: If a QuickPalette is applied to an exterior element, each surface is updated individually. To customize a QuickPalette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Right-click a QuickPalette in the Preview Bar and choose Edit QuickPalettes.
To change the default QuickPalette for drawing 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 From the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu, click the palette you want to use for subsequent surfaces in your drawing.
3 Close the QuickPalette dialog box. As you draw, the surfaces are finished based on the active QuickPalette.
Note: The red surfaces in the preview shows exactly where that material is applied.
33
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
2 Click the QuickPalette you want to edit from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed.
To rename a QuickPalette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the palette you want to edit from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed. 3 Type a new name in the Name field. 4 (optional) Type a description in the Description field to add details about this palette. 5 Close the QuickPalette dialog box. Note: You cannot rename the Default QuickPalette. To filter the default material display 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 Choose the palette you want to edit from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed. 3 At the bottom of the window, click Display Filter dropdown menu and choose which materials you want to see. The materials that are displayed are filtered based on your selection.
3 (optional) In the QuickPalette dialog box, click the preview that is associated with the surface you want to change. That color or material is displayed in the Preview Bar. 4 Find the color or material you want to use and drag and drop it onto the preview of the default material you want to customize. The QuickPalette is updated. Note: For more information on finding paint and colors, see Applying Paint and Color, on page 30. For more information on finding paint and colors, see Applying Building Materials, on page 31. 5 Close the QuickPalette dialog box. To reset the Default QuickPalette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 Click Default QuickPalette from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed. 3 Click the Reset button, at the bottom of the dialog box. Changes that have been made to the Default QuickPalette are reset. To create a new QuickPalette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Create Copy button. The Copy QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 3 (optional) Type a name for the custom palette in the Name field. 4 (optional) Type a description in the Description field to add details about this palette. Note: You can change the name and description while a palette is active in the QuickPalette dialog box. 5 Click OK. The new palette becomes active in the QuickPalette dialog box. You can now customize QuickPalette and apply it to your design. For more information on changing the colors and materials, see To customize a QuickPalette, on page 33.
To delete a QuickPalette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options, then click QuickPalette. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the dialog box. Note: You cannot delete the Default QuickPalette. 3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the palette. 4 Close the QuickPalette dialog box.
Adding a Visual Array

The Visual Array Tool makes it easy to add a line of plants, objects, and so on. From lining a path with plants, to edging a flowerbed with lights, you can enhance your plan with just a few clicks. In this example we will use plants, but the steps are the same for whatever you want to place. To add a line of plants 1 Click the Plants tab. The Preview Bar displays available plants.
Editing 3D Objects
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Plants dropdown menu to display the plant categories, then click to check the type of plants you want to place. 3 Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant selections in the Preview Bar. 4 Click to select the plant you want to add to your design. 5 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Visual Array Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 6 (optional) Type the distance you want between each plant and choose how you want the spacing measure. Press ENTER to accept new values. Gap Between- the distance is measured from the ends of each plant. Center to Center- the distance is measured from the centers of each plant. 7 On the design window, click once to set the first point of the line of plants, then drag your cursor in the direction you want.
Editing 3D Objects
Once youve placed 3D objects in your drawing, its easy to move, delete, copy, and rotate objects, usually involving just one or two mouse clicks. You can also edit objects, using 3D Custom Workshop. For more information, see 3D Custom Workshop, which begins on page 189. To resize an object 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click an object to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the Width, Height, and Depth, in feet and inches or percentages, to customize them. Press ENTER to accept new values. 4 (optional) If you want shadows, make sure the Cast Shadow checkbox is selected.
Note: As you draw, the footprint of each plant will be displayed. 8 Click to end drawing mode. The plants are placed in a line, at the spacing you defined.
5 (optional) Type an angle, if you want to rotate the object. Press ENTER to accept new values. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction. To rename objects 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click an object, then select Object Information from the menu. The Custom Workshop Object Information dialog box is displayed.
35
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
3 Type a new name in the Object Name field, then click OK. Note: This is the name that will be listed in the spreadsheet, created by TurboFloorPlan Estimator.
Organizing 3D Libraries
The Library Organizer is available for each of the objects libraries, as well as templates, plants, and accessories. In this example we will use the Custom Materials library, but the Library Organizer works the same way for all available libraries. To access the Library Organizer 1 Click the tab for the library you want to organize. In this case, were using the Materials tab. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu and click Library Organizer. The Library Organizer is displayed. Note: Some of the categories include a sub-menu, designated by an arrow on the right. 5 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To create a new category 1 Open the Library Organizer. 2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library to which you want to add a new category. The library categories are displayed.
You can edit the library categories and the individual materials within them. 3 Click the Library drop-down menu to see the available libraries. 4 Click the arrow at the top of the column to display the available categories for the active library.
3 In the Category section, click the New button. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, showing the library categories.
Organizing 3D Libraries
2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library from which you want to delete a category. The library categories are displayed. 3 In the Category section, click the Delete button. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, showing the library categories. 4 Select the folder, or sub-folder you want to delete and click OK. A confirmation message is displayed, confirming that you want to delete the category and all of its contents. Note: You cannot undo this action, so be sure you have moved any items you want to keep to a different category. You can add a new level-one category to the main folder (CustomTextures) or a sub-folder to an existing folder. You cannot add a new category within an existing subfolder. 4 Choose the location for the new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed. 5 Type a name in the Category Name field and click OK. The new category is now available in the category dropdown menu. 5 Click Yes. The category is deleted. 6 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To rename a category 1 Open the Library Organizer. 2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library in which you want to rename a category. The library categories are displayed. 3 In the Category section, click the Rename button. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, showing the library categories. 4 Select the folder, or sub-folder you want to rename and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed. 5 Type a new name in the Category Name field and click OK. The new category name is visible in the category drop-down menu. 6 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To move an item to a different library 1 Open the Library Organizer. 2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library from which you want to edit. The library categories are displayed. 6 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To delete a category 1 Open the Library Organizer. There are two columns displayed so you can view multiple library categories at once, and easily move items between them. 3 On one side of the Library Organizer, click the category drop-down menu and choose the source location; this is the category from which you want to move an item. The categorys contents are displayed.
37
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
4 Click to select the item you want to move. A preview is displayed. 5 On the other side of the Library Organizer, click the category drop-down menu and choose the target location; this is the category to which you want to move the item. The categorys contents are displayed. 6 Click the arrow that is pointing towards the target category (the category to which you want the item moved). The selection is moved to the target library. 7 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To delete an item from a library 1 Open the Library Organizer. 2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library from which you want to edit. The library categories are displayed. 3 On one side of the Library Organizer, click the category drop-down menu and choose the category from which you want to delete an item. The categorys contents are displayed. 4 Click to select the item you want to delete. A preview is displayed. 5 Click the Delete button that is available in the section below the preview. A confirmation message is displayed, confirming that you want to delete the selection. 6 Click Yes. The item is deleted. Note: You cannot undo this action. 7 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer. To edit an items details 1 Open the Library Organizer. 2 Click the Library drop-down menu and choose the library from which you want to edit. The library categories are displayed. 3 On one side of the Library Organizer, click the category drop-down menu and choose the category of the item you want to edit. The categorys contents are displayed. 4 Click to select the item you want to edit. A preview is displayed. 5 Click the Info button that is available in the section below the preview. The Info dialog box is displayed. 6 Edit the details you want to change and click OK. 7 Click the Close button to close the Library Organizer.
Chapter 7
Elevation View
TurboFloorPlans powerful Elevation View allows you to view and edit your design in 3D! You can add and remove windows or doors, or change their elevation, and all your changes are automatically applied to your 2D floor plan.
Set a pre-defined view direction
Click the direction from which you want to view your design, at the top of the toolbar. (optional) Right-click the design window and choose the direction you want.
Set a custom view direction 1 Click the Custom tab, at the top of the toolbar. 2 Click the Rotate Elevation View Angle Tool. 3 Click and drag in the design window to rotate to the desired view.
Adding and Modifying Doors and Windows

TurboFloorPlan takes the guesswork out of placing doors and windows by allowing you to add and modify doors and windows, while viewing your design in 3D. There are many styles of openings and doors available in Elevation View and they are all placed in the same manner. To add an opening or door 1 Click the Door Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Door Styles button to display the styles that are available. 3 Click the Door style of your choice. The Door Properties sheet is displayed. Elevation View TurboFloorPlan lets you easily edit your design in 3D. Opening Elevation View
4 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim to customize the properties. Press ENTER to accept new values. 5 Click a wall in the Elevation View window where you want to place the door or opening.
Click the Elevation View icon from the collapsible view toolset. (alternate) On the Window menu, click Elevation View. (alternate) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Elevation View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Changing Door Settings

There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of the doors features through the Custom Door dialog box. To change door type 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
39
Chapter
Elevation View
2 Click to select a door in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Door Styles button and choose the style you want. To resize a door by specifying dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a door in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new dimensions in the Dimensions area of the Tool Options sheet. Press ENTER to accept new values. To change door swing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a door in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new door swing angle in the text box and press ENTER. The door swing updates. To flip the direction of a door 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a door in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Flip Door button. The door flips. To change the elevation of a door 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a door to select it. 3 Click to select a door in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 4 Type the elevation in the text box and press ENTER to accept the values.
2 Click the Window Styles button to display the styles that are available. 3 Click the Window style of your choice. The Window Properties menu is displayed. 4 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim to customize the properties. Press ENTER to accept new values. 5 (optional) For double-hung or casement/ picture windows, specify the grill spacing. 6 Click a wall in the Elevation View window where you want to place a window. Note: If you change the elevation, all windows placed after this are placed at the newly-specified elevation.
Changing Window Settings

Elevation View allows you to resize, reposition, or change the properties on windows. You can specify exact dimensions, change the grill settings, flip windows vertically or horizontally, or change their elevations. To change window type 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Window Styles button and choose the style you want. To resize a window by specifying dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new sizes in the Dimensions area of the Tool Options sheet. Press ENTER to accept new values. To flip a window 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Flip button in the direction you want the window flipped. 4 Check the box next to Flip Horizontally, Flip Vertically, or both, then click OK. Note: Flip is not available for Double Hung or Casement/ Picture windows.
(alternate) Type the elevation in the Object Elevation field, at the top of the design window. Press ENTER to accept the values.
Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in the Elevation View and they are all placed in the same manner. To add a window 1 Click the Window Tool. The Tool Options are displayed.
Adding Accessories
To change the grill settings of a window 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the window in your drawing. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click either Double Hung or Casement/Picture. The Grill settings dialog is displayed. Note: The Grill settings only display when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window option is chosen. 4 Using the scroll bars in the Grill section, adjust the grill appearance, then click OK. The new grill settings are applied. To elevate a window 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the window to select it. 3 Type the elevation you want in the text box, and press ENTER.
Adding Accessories
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and so on, to any window. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls. For more information, see Adding Accessories, which begins on page 111.
41
Chapter
Elevation View
Part 2
Menu Bars
Just like with everything else, the best place to begin is with the basics. Within this section you will find information on techniques and features that you will use in TurboFloorPlan.
Chapter 8: File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 9: Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10: Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11: 2D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 12: 3D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 13: Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 14: Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45 53 59 67 75 89 91
Chapter 8
File Menu
When you start TurboFloorPlan, the QuickStart designer is displayed. If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open, or display, it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. Once you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view, and save it.
Starting a New File

You can have more than one file open at a time. The exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of memory in your system and the complexity of the home plan file. When you open a file, TurboFloorPlan displays it in a new window. The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computers memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As. At any point during the design process you can import objects created in 3D Custom Workshop to further customize your design. In addition, you can export a 3D View rendering to make it easy to share your design with friends. Starting a new file displays QuickStart, an easy way to start your design process. For more information, see QuickStart, which begins on page 95.The first time TurboFloorPlan is launched, you will be asked to Register your software. To save a new, unnamed file 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2 Type a file name in the File Name text box. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the PRO extension. 3 Click OK.
Opening a File
Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, making it available for you to edit or print the plan drawing. To open an existing file 1 On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.
45
Chapter
File Menu
4 Click OK. To see a list of recently opened files 1 On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open Recent listing is displayed. 2 On the Open Recent pop-up, click the file you want to open. The file loads into memory. To clear the recently opened files listing 1 On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open Recent listing is displayed. 2 On the Open Recent pop-up, click Clear Recent Designs List. A warning box is displayed. 3 Click Yes to delete all files from the listing. Click No to leave the listing unchanged.
5 When you find the plan you want, click Open Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design window.
Accessing the 20 Pre-Drawn Home Plans

TurboFloorPlan includes a wide variety of home plans for you to alter. The included home plans are located in the directory where you installed the program, in a subdirectory called Plans. To open a pre-drawn home plan 1 Open your TurboFloorPlan software and click File, Open. 2 On the screen that appears, click the down arrow beside My Documents and select C: Drive. 3 From the folders that appear in the window, doubleclick Program Files. 4 From the next set of folders that appear, click TurboFloorPlan 5 Select Plans from the next set of folders. 6 The 20 plans will appear in the window. Double-click the plan you wish to view. Note: All plans included with TurboFloorPlan are the copyright of Wolfgang Trost Architects. The plans and 3D computer images are for conceptual purposes only. You must have any plans provided in, or generated by, TurboFloorPlan checked by a licensed architect, before you build. IMSI/Design, Punch! Software LLC and Wolfgang Trost Architects are not liable for errors, omissions, or any other deficiencies in these conceptual plans. Complete sets of building plans for these homes are available by contacting Wolfgang Trost Architects, at www.wolfgangtrost.com.
Accessing the Sample Plans

Sample plans are another set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect, that can be used as-is or can be edited to your liking. There are eleven sample plans available, each with 2D and 3D previews, and room dimensions. To open a sample plan 1 Click Sample Plans on the QuickStart dialog.
Closing a File
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computers memory. When you are done working in TurboFloorPlan, close all your files and exit the program. To close a file
2 By default, all home styles are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the Style drop-down menu. 3 Scroll through the style options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the plans dimensions. 4 (optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see the home in 3D.
On the File menu, click Close. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, TurboFloorPlan prompts you to save them before it closes the file.
To close all open files and exit
On the File menu, click Exit. If any open drawings have unsaved changes, TurboFloorPlan prompts you to save them before it closes their files.
Saving a File
Saving a File
When you open a file, TurboFloorPlan copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disc. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after youve completed any work you wouldnt want to redo. When you click the Save command, TurboFloorPlan saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks. To save an existing file

4 Click OK. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design. Note: Double-click the object to open it in 3D Custom Workshop. To import a DXF/DWG file 1 On the File menu, click Import, DXF/DWG File. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, double-click to select it. The Scale menu is displayed. 4 Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use. 5 Click OK. Note: Once you have imported your file, you will need to convert the lines into intelligent objects before they can be viewed in 3D. For more information, see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 165. To import a SketchUp file
On the File menu, click Save. (alternate) Right-click, then click Save on the pop-up menu that is displayed. (alternate) Press CTRL+S.
To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2 If you want to save the drawing under another name, type a name in the File Name text box. 3 If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box. 4 Click OK.
1 On the File menu, click Import, SketchUp File. The Import SketchUp Design dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, double-click to select it. Note: The Status Bar displays the progress, as the file is converted. To import a 3DS file 1 On the File menu, click Import, 3DS File. The Import 3DS Design dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, double-click to select it. Note: The Status Bar displays the progress, as the file is converted. To import a material 1 On the File menu, click Import, then click Material to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Importing Files
You can import a variety of file types into TurboFloorPlan. From designing custom furniture in 3D Custom Workshop to importing designs from other popular software, you are able to design and customize your dream home faster and easier than ever before. To import a 3D Custom Workshop object 1 On the File menu, click Import, Custom Workshop Object. The Import 3D Object dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.
47
Chapter
File Menu
7 (optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent. 8 Choose the Library Location where you want to save your new material. 9 Click OK. To import an accessory 1 On the File menu, click Import, then click Accessory to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 4 Click Open. The Material Importer dialog is displayed. To make an image seamless 1 On the Material Importer dialog, click one of the seamless options. Horizontal blends images along their sides; Vertical blends images along the top and bottom; Both blends horizontally and vertically; None does not blend.
2 In the File name field, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 4 Click Open. The Accessory Importer dialog is displayed. 5 Type the filename in the Accessory Filename text box. 6 Type a description of the new accessory in the Accessory Description text box. New accessory descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.
2 Click one of the blend options. A lower blend option concentrates blending at the edges of the image. A higher blend option concentrates blending across the entire image. 3 Type the filename in the Material Filename text box. 4 Type a description of the new material in the Material Description text box. New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters. 5 Type the real-world dimensions of the material image in the Width and Height text boxes. 6 (optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the image in that direction, rather than replicate it.
7 Type the real-world dimensions of the accessory image in the Width and Height text boxes. 8 (optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the image in that direction, rather than replicate it. 9 (optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the accessory image as transparent. 10 Choose the Library Location where you want to save your new accessory. 11 Click OK. To import a plant 1 On the File menu, click Import, then click Plant to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Importing Files
2 In the File name field, enter the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.
Note: Some categories have sub-categories. Simply expand the main category to see the sub-categories. 14 (optional) Type a new name in the Save File As field. 15 Click Finish. The plant is imported based on the details youve provided and is displayed in the preview bar automatically. The plant details can be edited in the Plant Details dialog box. For more information, see To edit plant details, which begins on page 27. To import a 3D background 1 On the File menu, click Import, then click 3D Background. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File name field, enter the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and click Open. The 3D Background Import dialog box is displayed, with a preview of your background behind a house design.
4 Click Open. The Plant Import Wizard welcome page is displayed.
5 Click Import to import an information file (.pti file) for this plant. 6 Click Next. The Description page is displayed. 7 Type characteristics in the corresponding fields to describe the plant you are importing. 8 Click Next. The Requirements page is displayed. 9 Specify the plants requirements, such as sunlight, water, and soil type. 10 Click Next. The Miscellaneous page is displayed. 11 Specify the planting zone and growth rate. Note: For more information on regional and temperature requirements, see Viewing Hardiness Zones, on page 27. 12 Click Next. The Finish page is displayed. 13 Choose the Plant Category to which you want to import the plant.
4 In the Library Location window, choose the library to which you want to import the background. Some categories have sub-categories. Simply expand the main category to see the sub-categories. Note: The default import library is the Custom Materials library. You can create new categories for imported items, if you want to maintain these types of files in a separate folder, or move the file after it has been imported using the Library Organizer. For more information, see Organizing 3D Libraries, which begins on page 36. 5 Type a filename and description for the background in the corresponding fields. 6 Specify the rendering options. 7 Click OK. The background is visible in the 3D view and is displayed in the Preview Bar, in the library that was selected.
49
Chapter
File Menu
2 Click the Format drop-down menu and choose the format you want. 3 Click the Version drop-down menu and choose the version you want. 4 Click Export. The Export dialog box is displayed. 5 Type a file name in the File Name text box. TurboFloorPlan DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension. 6 Click Save. To export a 2D image 1 On the File menu, click Export, 2D Image. The 2D Image Export Settings dialog box is displayed.
To apply background images
Background images are applied just like other materials and colors. For more information, see Applying Building Materials, which begins on page 31.
Exporting Files
You can export a 2D drawing file or a rendering of your 3D View window to BMP, JPG, PNG, or TIFF format. Files can be exported in Textured, Wireframe, and ClearView modes. The exported file will appear just as your 3D View window does. Be sure to render your drawing in high-resolution, before exporting. Size is also controlled by how your 3D View window appears; the larger the 3D View window, the larger the file will be. For more information on controlling the 3D View environment, see Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 17. By exporting your design to VRML, it becomes available for viewing with a VRML viewer or through a web browser (provided an appropriate plug-in is installed). These helper applications and plug-ins are available as free downloads on the Internet. Note: The 3D design will appear without the materials, when viewed from a VRML file. You can also export animation and a landscape quote, if your drawing includes these features. You can even send a list of plants and mulch beds to your iPhone and load it into the Landscape Quote app. Then you can enter the prices from the nursery to keep track of costs. To export a DXF/DWG file 1 On the File menu, click Export, DXF/DWG File. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Export Format section, choose the file format you want. 3 In the Image section, select the sizing options you want and drag the Image Size slider to specify the size. 4 In the View Options section, select the options you want and choose which layer method you want. 5 Click Export. The Export Image dialog box is displayed. 6 Browse to the folder where you want the image to be exported and type a new file name, if desired. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the extension. 7 Click Save. The 2D image is exported to the location youve specified. To export a 3D Image 1 On the File menu, click Export, 3D View Image. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
Printing Floor Plans
2 Click the radio button next to the format you want to use, then click OK. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 3 (optional) Click the radio button next to the Export Quality that is needed. 4 (optional) Set a size for the exported image. 5 Click OK. The Export Image dialog box is displayed. 6 Browse to the folder where you want the image to be exported and type a new file name, if desired. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the extension. 7 Click Save. The 3D image is exported to the location youve specified. To export to VRML 1 On the File menu, click Export, VRML. The Export VRML dialog box is displayed. 2 Browse to the folder where you want the image to be exported and type a new file name, if desired. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the extension. 3 Click Save. The VRML file is exported to the location youve specified. To export an animation 1 On the File menu, click Export, Animation. The Animation Export Settings dialog box is displayed.
To export to Landscape Quote 1 On the File menu, click Export, Landscape Quote. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the extension, then click OK. 3 Email that file to your iPhone. 4 On your iPhone, press the attachment icon and select Open in LandscapeQ. 5 Once in Landscape Quote, just fill in the prices of the items you want to budget.
Printing Floor Plans

TurboFloorPlan prints, using the current Windows printer drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print Setup dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. You can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, whatever you require. Follow these steps to print your 2D drawing. To print to fit page 1 On the File menu, click Print or press CTRL+P. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 2 Under Print Scale, select Print to fit page. 3 (optional) Select Print current view only to print only what is visible in your current design. If deselected, the entire drawing is printed, regardless of your current view. 4 (optional) If printing the entire view, select Ignore Topography Bounds to disregard topography lines that exist on the lot. If deselected, all topography lines are included when printed, up to the lot edge. 5 Click Print. The drawing is printed based on your current settings. Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed. To print to scale 1 On the File menu, click Print or press CTRL+P. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 2 Under Print Scale, select Print to scale. The scaling options become available.
2 Drag the sliders to specify the video size and video quality. 3 (optional) Select to render shadows in the exported video. 4 (optional) Select to play the video upon export. 5 (optional) Specify the fade color. 6 Click OK. The Export Animation Video dialog box is displayed. 7 Browse to the folder where you want the video to be exported and type a new file name, if desired. TurboFloorPlan automatically adds the extension. 8 Click Save. The video file is exported to the location youve specified.
51
Chapter
File Menu
3 Click to select the scale you want. The print preview is updated based on your selection. 4 (optional) Select Print current view only to print only what is visible in your current design. If deselected, the entire drawing is printed, regardless of your current view. 5 (optional) If printing the entire view, select Ignore Topography Bounds to disregard topography lines that exist on the lot. If deselected, all topography lines are included when printed. 6 Click Print. The drawing is printed based on your current settings. Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed. To change printer settings 1 On the File menu, click Print or press CTRL+P. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Printer Setup button, in the top left corner. The Print Setup window is displayed.
5 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size. 6 Click OK.
3 Click the printer you want to use. 4 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size. 5 Click OK.
Printing a 3D View Rendering

TurboFloorPlan streamlines the process used to print the 3D View images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print beautiful, full-color renderings of your design. To print a 3D View rendering 1 On the File menu, click Print 3D View, then select the quality needed. 2 If a quality other than the current rendered image is selected, specify the size. 3 Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4 Click the printer you want to use.
Chapter 9
Edit Menu
In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste, and delete, TurboFloorPlan includes more sophisticated modes of editing your design. You can copy or move entities, walls, and so on, to different floors, as well as between plan layers.
You can flip or mirror your entire design, either vertically or horizontally, to make it easy to view it from any angle, or from any direction. In addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time. More advanced concepts are also covered here, such as rotating individual entities to custom fit them into your design and elevating entities, using the Elevation Bar, to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so TurboFloorPlan works best for you.
Undo
With TurboFloorPlan, you can specify up to 50 levels of Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level at the lowest level possible. To use undo
On the Edit menu, click Undo or press CTRL+Z. The previous action is reversed.
To turn off undo 1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed.
53
Chapter
Edit Menu
To delete a selection 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the selection you want to delete. 3 Press DELETE on the keyboard. 2 Click the Deactivate Undo (Faster) box, then click OK. To set undo parameters 1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the number of undo levels you want to use; click OK. To use redo
Nudge
You can also precisely move features into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected features a specified distance. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, refer to Using the Grid, on page 69. To adjust Nudge settings 1 On the 2D Menu, confirm there is a check next to Snap to Grid. This confirms that the Snap Grid is activated. 2 On the 2D Menu, click Grid Properties or press CTRL+G. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
On the Edit menu, click Redo or press CTRL+Y. The previous action is reversed.
Cut, Copy, and Paste

Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into your drawing. By default, when you paste a selection multiple times, each time you paste, the object is offset so each is visible. You can also paste a selection without offset, so each time you paste the selection it will stack on top of the previous one. You can place the Clipboard contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection. To cut a selection 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the selection you want to cut. 3 On the Edit menu click Cut, or press CTRL+X. The selection is removed to the Clipboard. To copy a selection to the clipboard 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the selection you want to copy. 3 On the Edit menu click Copy, or press CTRL+C. The selection is copied to the Clipboard. To paste a selection from the clipboard 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Edit menu click Paste, or press CTRL+V. The selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design window. To move a selection using the Nudge feature 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the entity to select it. 3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right). 4 (optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity.
3 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid distance you want to set. Click OK. 4 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard. Note: When the Snap to Grid is turned off, Nudge moves the entity or feature one pixel at a time, instead of snapping to the grid distance.
Moving a Selection
Once youve placed features, you can move them by dragging or by specifying exact Cartesian or polar
Rotating a Selection
coordinates that correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the reference grid, see Using the Grid, on page 69. To move entities by dragging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click an entity to select it. To select more than one entity, hold down SHIFT while clicking. 3 Holding down the mouse button, drag the entity to a new location, then release the mouse button. To move entities by specifying coordinates 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click an entity to select it. To select more than one entity, hold down SHIFT while clicking. 3 Click Move on the Edit menu. The Move dialog box is displayed.
To rotate by specifying an amount 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want to rotate. 3 Right-click the selection and click Rotate on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
4 Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to rotate the entity and click OK. The entity is rotated. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.
Flip and Mirror

4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type new X and Y-Axis coordinates in the appropriate text boxes. 5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based on the coordinates you specified. The Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that Mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical entities, facing one another. To flip a feature horizontally 1 Click the feature you want to flip. 2 On the Edit menu, click Flip Horizontal. To flip a feature vertically 1 Click the feature you want to flip. 2 On the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical. To mirror a feature horizontally 1 Click the feature you want to mirror. 2 On the Edit menu, click Mirror Horizontal. 3 Move the feature into position. To mirror a feature vertically 1 Click the feature you want to mirror. 2 On the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical. 3 Move the feature into position.
Rotating a Selection
Using the rotate feature, you can easily spin an entity around any point. This is useful when you want to face an entity in a different direction from which it was drawn. Using the Rotate Tool, you can freely rotate the selection, or you can specify the exact amount of rotation, using the Rotate dialog box. To freely rotate an entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want to rotate. 3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. 4 Click the entity; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the entity to rotate. Degree of rotation will appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. Press SHIFT to release the 45degree constraint. 5 Release the mouse button. Note: The item rotates around its center point.
55
Chapter
Edit Menu
Aligning to Grid
Align to Grid makes it easy to align a feature or group to a point on the Snap Grid. To align to grid 1 Click the feature or features you want to align to the grid. 2 On the Edit menu, click Align to Grid, then click how you want the feature or group aligned. The group will be aligned to the grid.
Elevation Bar
Using the Elevation Bar is the easiest way to set the elevation of each object or group of objects. From lifting lamps onto tables to elevating planters and benches onto your deck, exact placement is simple. With the Object Elevation field in the toolbar, you can move selected items vertically by simply entering the elevation you want. This on-the-fly feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants, and so on, are in exactly the position you want. Additionally, the Object Elevation field automatically detects the elevation of nearby objects in the drawing. This allows you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck, for example. To elevate an entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the entity you want to elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active.
2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The entity is elevated. Note: To specify an amount in inches you may use either 18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they must be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18'-0", 8'-6", and so on. A single number like 20 will be understood as 20 inches. 3 (optional) Select Float Above Topography. The entity will follow the lay of the land. To set the elevation of a group of entities 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Hold down SHIFT and click to select each entity you want to elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar. Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely. 3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches, or just inches, then press ENTER. The selections are elevated based on the values you entered. OR 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches, or just inches, then press ENTER. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered. 4 (optional) Click the arrow and select an active elevation in the drawing.
2 Hold down SHIFT and click to select each entity you want to elevate. 3 On the Edit menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.
OR 1 On the Edit menu, click Set Object Elevation or rightclick the object and select Set Elevation from the pop-up menu. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.
Copy To Floor
Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely. 4 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The entities are elevated. Note: All selected entities will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the entities were originally located at various elevations. To elevate to nearby elevations 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to elevate to an existing elevation in the design window. Note: The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the surface to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a potted plant to a deck surface, drag the plant so it is positioned within the boundaries of the deck. 3 Deselect the Float Above Topography checkbox on the Elevation Bar, if it is selected. 4 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. A list of detected elevations appears.
3 Check the Float Above Topography checkbox on the Elevation Bar.
Copy To Floor
There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the entity in its original position and places a duplicate where you define. Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position. To copy from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the entities you want duplicated. To select more than one entity, press SHIFT, while clicking entities. 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level. To move entities from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the entities you want to move. To select more than one entity, press SHIFT, while clicking entities. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level.
5 Select the surface to which you want the entity elevated. The object is elevated. To set the working elevation 1 On the Design menu , click Set Working Elevation. A dialog box appears.
2 Enter the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, and click OK.
(alternate) While nothing is selected, the Working Elevation field is active in the toolbar. Type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, then press ENTER. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation.
To make features follow custom topography 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature(s) you want to follow the custom topography.
57
Chapter
Edit Menu
Move To Plan
With TurboFloorPlan, you can move selections to different plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position. This will be useful if you want to move a feature between two stories that you have drawn. To move features from one plan to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want moved. To select more than one entity, press SHIFT, while clicking entities. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear. 4 (alternate) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan. Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be moved along with the other items and features in your drawing.
Rotate Entire Plan

At any point during the design process, you can rotate the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look facing a different direction on your lot. To rotate the entire floor plan 1 On the Design menu, click Rotate Entire Plan. The Rotate Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.
2 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan, in the Angle text box. 3 Click OK. The plan is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.
Move Entire Plan

At any point during the design process, you can move the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot. To move the entire floor plan 1 On the Design menu, click Move Entire Plan. The Move Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.
2 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type the amount you want the plan moved in the appropriate text boxes. 3 Click OK. The plan is moved, based on the coordinates you specified. Note: Coordinates are measured in inches, or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
Chapter 10
Design Menu
TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to control your working environment. From setting the plan scale and units of measure to defining your ceiling heights on any floor of your design, all these tools are available on the Design Menu.
TurboFloorPlan even lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once scanned and loaded into your design file, you can trace it to create a TurboFloorPlan floor plan. You can even set the scale of the new drawing to the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background bitmap image. Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service, scan the plan and save it in one of the most popular formats. The designer or owner of most home plans holds the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you copy a plan.
Setting the Working Elevation

Before you draw, be sure to set your working elevation. All entities are drawn in relation to this elevation. To set the working elevation 1 On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Working Elevation edit box, type a new value. 3 Click OK.
Default Ceiling Height

Not only can you control your working elevation and individual object elevations, but you can set your default ceiling height. Once you define your default ceiling height, all walls will be drawn to that height.
59
Chapter
10 Design Menu
To set default ceiling height 1 On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights. The Default Ceiling Heights dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the ceiling height(s) you want for the corresponding floor(s) and click OK.
Setting the Scale

Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale. To set the drawing scale 1 On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale dialog box is displayed.
4 (optional) Click the arrow next to Precision and select the number of decimal points you want to use.
2 Click a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.
Unit of Measure
You can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened. To use English measurements 1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed. 2 Click English Units.
6 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied. To use Metric measurements 1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed. 2 Click Metric Units.
Lot Properties
To modify the lot properties 1 On the Design menu, click Lot Properties. The Lot Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 (optional) Type a value in Width or Depth text boxes, then select a unit of measurement from the drop-down box. 3 (optional) Click to raise or lower the Patch Resolution. A lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of your topography, but may also impact performance.
4 (optional) Check the Render Patch Lines checkbox to include patch lines, when rendering in ClearView. 5 (optional) Check the Render Lot Base checkbox to render the subsurface as a solid. 6 (optional) In the Topography Generation section, click to raise or lower the Generation Quality. Higher generation quality reduces rendering speed. 7 Click OK.
5 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied. To set defaults for previous designs 1 Follow the instructions for either English or Metric units, outlined above, then click the box to set the defaults for all previously-drawn designs.
Update Topography Grid

TurboFloorPlan keeps track of the changes you make to the topography in your design. If you want to update the topography grid, you can do this with one click. To update topography grid
On the Design Menu, click Update Topography Grid. Your topography changes will be applied.
2 Click OK. The defaults will be applied to any previously-drawn design when it is opened.
Work on Plan
By default TurboFloorPlan opens in 2D Full View with the Floor Plan Tab active. You can change which plan you want to design. To change the working plan
Lot Properties
The Lot Properties dialog box allows you to control not only the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D.
On the Design Menu, click Work on Plan, then click a plan.
61
Chapter
10 Design Menu
To set font before adding text 1 On the Design menu, click Text Font. The Font dialog box is displayed. 2 Set the font as you want it to be applied to all subsequent text. 3 Click OK. To place text in your drawing 1 On the collapsible Text Toolset, click the Multi-Line Text Tool. 2 Click the area where you want to place text on the drawing page. An Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
(alternate) Click a plan tab.
Work on Floor
Use the Working Floor button to switch back and forth between the floors in your home plan. When you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu is displayed. Simply click the floor on which you would like to work to switch the current working floor. To work on a selected floor
On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, or click the Working Floor button at the bottom left of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work. (alternate) To work on the first floor, press CTRL+1. (alternate) To work on the second floor, press CTRL+2. (alternate) To work on the third floor, press CTRL+3.
Calculate Area
TurboFloorPlans QuickStart automatically calculates the square footage for each room of your design as you add them. QuickStart also updates the square footage, as you change the walls in your design. You can calculate the square footage for each floor at any time. This feature makes it easy to figure how much carpet youll need to cover the first floor, for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size. To calculate floor square footage
3 Type the annotation in the text box. 4 (optional) Click Font; the Font dialog box is displayed. Choose the Font, Style, and Size.
On the Design Menu, click Calculate Area, then click the floor you want to calculate. TurboFloorPlan calculates the square footage and the total is displayed on the Status Bar. 5 Click OK.
Note: The square footage calculation is based on wall centerline measurements.
6 Click OK in the Edit Text dialog box. The text is displayed in the design window. To change alignment of multi-line text
Text Font
Use text to add information to your drawing. For example, you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan. TurboFloorPlan gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different formatting techniques for each text instance. Text you place in your drawing is displayed on all 2D printed output.
1 Using the Selection Tool, click the text you want to change. The Tool Options are displayed.
Planting Age
2 In the Align section, select the alignment you want. The text is updated. To place text at an angle 1 On the collapsible Text Toolset, click the Rotated Text Tool. 2 Click the area where you want to place text on the drawing page. An Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Edit button. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the Font button. The Font dialog box is displayed. 4 Select the font, font style, and size you want. 5 Click OK, then click OK in the Edit Text dialog box. The updated text is displayed in the design window.
Planting Age
TurboFloorPlan includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the ones that grow best in your area of the country. To set the planting age 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Type the annotation in the text box. 4 Click the radio button next to the angle you want or enter a custom angle in the dialog box. 5 (optional) Click the Font button to change the font style and size, then click OK. 6 Click OK in the Edit Text dialog box. The text is placed in the drawing. To edit text 1 Click the text you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Edit button. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed. (optional) Double-click the text you want to edit. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed. 3 Text new text or make changes to the existing text. 4 Click OK. The updated text is displayed in the design window. To change formatting of existing text 1 Using the Selection Tool, click the text you want to change. The Tool Options are displayed. 4 Type the age of the plant at the time of planting and click OK.
2 Click to select the plant you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 On the Design menu, click Planting Age. The Planting Age dialog box is displayed.
(optional) On the Tool Options tab, type the age of the plant at the time of planting and press ENTER.
Note: Planting age can be adjusted only after a plant is placed.
Plant Growth Projection

With TurboFloorPlan you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years. To set maximum growth projection 1 On the Design menu, click Plant Growth Projection. The Plant Growth Projection dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the maximum growing age for plants in the Grow To text field and click OK.
63
Chapter
10 Design Menu
To access the plant inventory bar
To grow your landscape 1 On the Window menu, open a 3D View window and position it to easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature. 2 Click the Landscape tab. The Plant Growth Meter is displayed to the right of the plan tools. 3 Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the Plant Growth Meter makes the plants appear younger, while pressing the larger tree, on the right, makes them appear older.
On the Design menu, click Show Plant Bar. The Plant Inventory Bar is displayed across the bottom of the design window.
Import a Floor Plan Image

After you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved it, you are ready to import it into TurboFloorPlan. You can import a floor plan image onto the second or third floor also. To be sure all floors line up correctly, scan all plans at the same size and match the scale identically (see following section). To load a floor plan trace image 1 On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Floor Plan Trace Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note: The age is displayed in the Status Bar. 2 Click the Set Image button. The Open dialog box is displayed. Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see To set the planting age, on page 63. 3 Locate the directory where you saved the file.
Show Plant Bar

TurboFloorPlan keeps track of which plants you have used in your landscape. From this bar, you can easily find and/or replace all occurrences of each plant in your design. The Plant Inventory Bar shows all plants that are on the visible plan and on the active floor.
Note: You can import a plan to trace in any of the following file formats; BMP, JPG, PSD, PNG, TGA, WMF, EMF, WBMP, or PTX. 4 Click the filename, then click Open. The floor plan loads into the window.
Match the Drawing Scale
Match the Drawing Scale

If the floor plan is not the correct size, you can scale it in TurboFloorPlan. Be sure to use the same scale when preparing to trace an upper floor. To match the drawing scale 1 On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Floor Plan Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Set Image button, then open the file you want to import. 3 Find a wall section with a known length on the scanned image. 9 Click the Percentage or Dimensions radio button, depending on which method you want to use to resize the image. 10 Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to equal amounts, to change the scale of the entire drawing in proportion. Repeat until you have matched the scale. 11 Click OK. Note: If you need the imported image to be larger, the percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if you need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less than 100%. 4 Click the Virtual Ruler. For information on how to use the Virtual Ruler, see The Virtual Ruler, on page 73. If you do not see the Virtual Ruler, zoom out until you locate it. 5 Move the Virtual Ruler into position, along the wall of the scanned image. 6 Extend the Virtual Ruler to match the known length on the image. 7 Set the Virtual Ruler parallel to the wall segment. Note: It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize the margin of error when scaling.
Trace the Imported Floor Plan

Tracing the image is an easy, straight-forward process. Using the tools explained earlier in this Users Guide, you will soon have an editable floor plan of your scan. To trace the floor plan image
To trace walls, see To draw walls, which begins on page 101. To add electrical features, see Electrical Plan Tab, which begins on page 119. To place landscape plants, see To add plants, which begins on page 26.
Show/Hide an Imported Floor Plan

There may be times when it is easier to work on your floor plan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to toggle the Floor Plan Trace image on and off. To hide the floor plan trace image 8 On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Floor Plan Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 1 On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Floor Plan Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to uncheck the Image Visible checkbox, then click OK.
(alternate) On the Design menu, click Show Floor Plan Trace Image. The image is visible when there is a checkmark next to this menu listing.
65
Chapter
10 Design Menu
To show the floor plan trace image 1 On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Floor Plan Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to check the Image Visible checkbox, then click OK.
(alternate) On the Design menu, click Floor Plan Trace Image Visible. The image is hidden when there is no checkmark next to this menu listing.
Chapter 11
2D Menu
TurboFloorPlan provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view or using only 3D View.
When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction. 3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design. In this chapter, youll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.
View the 2D Plan

When initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, TurboFloorPlan organizes your floor plan into layers, which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time! To view all 2D floor plan views at once
On the 2D Menu, click Visible Floors, then click View All Floors.
To view the working floor only
On the 2D Menu, click Visible Floors, then click View Working Floor Only.
67
Chapter
11 2D Menu
To reset the 2D plan view

To view drawing layer combinations 1 Click a plan tab. 2 Click the arrow to the right of the tab label. A drop-down menu will appear. 3 Click the plan you want to view. 4 (optional) Repeat until the combination you want is reached.
On the 2D menu, click Reset Plan View. (alternate) Press CTRL+E on your keyboard. Your plan is reset to the original, default view.
Fit Your Design to Your Current Window Size

You can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan Tool or Zoom Tool. To fit your entire design within your window

Zoom In and Out in 2D

You can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom factor to obtain exact zoom precision. Once youve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous, full view with one mouse click. To zoom in 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Zoom button. 2 Click on the design window and drag in an upward direction to zoom in. 3 Click on the design window and drag in a downward direction to zoom out. Note: When the mouse is clicked, the location of the cursor will be centered on the design window. To zoom in using the wheel mouse
On the 2D menu, click Fit to Window. (alternate) Press CTRL+F.
Customize Visible Plans

During the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers. To hide a plan layer from view 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear. 3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want hidden.
Click on the design window and use the mouses wheel to zoom in and out.
Note: To access this feature, using some older wheel mouse drivers, set the Scrolling Size to None in the Control Panel>Mouse>Mouse Properties>Buttons dialog box. To set the zoom factor 1 On the 2D menu, click Set Plan View Zoom. The Set Plan View Zoom dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Double-click the Zoom Tool. 2 Type a new zoom factor, then click OK. Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing. To view a plan layer 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear. 3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want to appear. 68 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Using the Grid
Note: Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs. Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625 (1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 meter (Metric). To select grid spacing 1 On the 2D Menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Right-click on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 Type new horizontal and vertical measurements in the Grid Dots/Lines section of the Grid Spacing page, then click OK. The new grid spacing is applied.
Using the Grid

With TurboFloorPlan you can set specific grid properties that aid in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on the reference grid, which is useful when you want to make sure certain points are specified precisely. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects, snapping objects to the grid, and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is on. You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid style, and hiding or displaying. Grid properties can also be set by accessing the right-click menu, with nothing selected. To define Snap to Grid settings 1 On the 2D Menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Right-click on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
To change the grid style 1 On the 2D Menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Right-click on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 Click the Grid Style page tab. 3 Click either Grid Dots or Grid Lines, then click OK. The new grid style is applied.
2 On the Grid Properties dialog box, type new measurements in the Snap Grid text boxes, then click OK. Items you draw or drag-and-drop into the design window will now snap to the measurements youve defined. 3 (optional) When you change the Snap Grid settings, Minor Grid Lines are displayed. To turn off the display of Minor Grid Lines, click to uncheck the Show Minor Grid Lines checkbox.
Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/ Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric).
69
Chapter
11 2D Menu
In addition to snap points, you can control the laser alignment, which is displayed when your cursor is in alignment with an existing point, as you are dragging. To disable automatic snaps 1 On the 2D menu, choose AutoSnap Options. The Snap Options dialog box is displayed.
To move objects/features along the grid 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object or feature you want to move. 3 Using the arrow keys on your keyboard, move the object or feature into position. Note: Each time you press an arrow key, the object or feature will move one increment that you have set in the Snap Grid settings. To align objects/features with an area of the grid 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object or feature you want to align. 3 On the Edit menu, click Align to Grid, then click the area of the grid where you want your selection aligned.
2 Deselect the On checkbox, under Auto Snap, to disable the snap points that are displayed as you design. 3 Click OK. Note: You can enable the snap points by selecting Auto Snap On. To control automatic snaps 1 On the 2D menu, choose AutoSnap Options. The Snap Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Deselect the snap points you do not want displayed as you design. Intersections displays the intersection of two lines.
To turn off Snap to Grid
On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid. The feature is disabled. To enable Snap to Grid, simply recheck the menu item. (alternate) Press CTRL+R. (alternate) Right-click the design window and click Snap to Grid on the pop-up menu.
To display the grid
On the 2D Menu, click to check Grid Visible. The grid is displayed on the design window. (alternate) Right-click the design window and click Grid Visible on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Segment Center displays the center point along a segment, as you drag.
AutoSnap Options
Snap points are automatically enabled as you design. Snap points are designated points or hot spots where your cursor can lock-in, for help with accurate placement. By default, when Auto Snaps are enabled, the midpoint and endpoints are displayed when your cursor reaches these points. You can control these, and other hot spots or points, to which your cursor snaps on the Snap Options dialog box, which is available on the 2D menu. 70 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide On segment displays when your cursor is actively on a segment, as you drag.
Selection Filter
Object Center displays the center of an object as you drag to place within its bounds. A useful example would be centering a lamp on a table.
able to select. When you hold down CTRL, you will only be able to select those features.
Angle Constraint locks a point to an adjacent segments angle. When selected, this also constrains a line angle to 1-degree increments as you draw. To control snap radius 1 On the 2D menu, choose AutoSnap Options. The Snap Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Drag the Snap Radius slider to change the radius of the snap point. Notice, as the size is adjusted, the actual radius of the snap point is affected. 3 Click OK to accept your changes.
For example, to select a transom window, placed over a door, check Windows on the Selection Filter. Hold down CTRL and click where the window and door are placed and you will only select the window.
Dimensioning
Small Snap Radius To control laser alignment 1 On the 2D menu, choose AutoSnap Options. The Snap Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Deselect the Laser Alignment On option to disable this function, or select to enable. 3 Click OK. Large Snap Radius TurboFloorPlan automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors, and other items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall Tool will be especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. Youll find this tool extremely useful when measuring between the main house and the walls of other buildings, like a garden shed or playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your plan drawing without dimension annotation. You have the option of turning off automatic dimensioning, if you dont want it displayed on the drawing page or as you draw. All Dimensioning tools can be found on the collapsible Text & Annotation Toolset. Click the disclosure triangle to access the drop down menu, and click the tool you want to use.
Note: You can enable/disable the laser alignment at anytime.
Selection Filter
There will be times that you will place items atop one another. To make it easier to select each layer, use the Selection Filter. Click the type of feature(s) you want to be
71
Chapter
11 2D Menu
2 Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require. 3 Release the mouse button to set the measurement. To use the diameter dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Diameter Dimension Tool. 2 Click one edge of a circle drawn on the Details Tab to define the starting point. The dimension will automatically snap to the opposite edge of the circle. 3 (optional) Move the mouse clockwise or counterclockwise, to position the diameter dimension, before releasing the mouse button. To use the leader dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Leader Dimension Tool. 2 Position your cursor at the start point for the leader, then click and drag to define the first segment of the dimension. 3 Release the mouse button and move the mouse in the direction you want the second segment to be placed. 4 Click to end. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed. 5 Type the text you want to be displayed with the leader and click OK. The text that is displayed is based on the leader type that is selected. Note: To change the leader type, see To change the leader dimension type, on page 72 To change the leader dimension type 1 Click to select the leader dimension on the design window. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 In the Type section, select the leader type you want. The leader is updated based on the type you select. Marker displays an incremental number, with the leader text visible when you hover over it with your mouse. This saves space when there is a lot of text to be displayed. Label displays the leader text in the design window. A list of leader markers can be printed. For more information, see Printing Floor Plans, which begins on page 51.
To use the wall-spacing dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Dimension Wall Tool. 2 Click a wall on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the second wall. 3 Release the mouse button to set the measurement. To use the offset dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Offset Dimension Tool. 2 Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require. 3 Release the mouse button. 4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the dimension. 5 Click to end. To use the length dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Length Dimension Tool. 2 Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require. 3 Release the mouse button. 4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the dimension. 5 Click to end. To use the zero-offset dimension tool 1 On the collapsible Text and Annotation Toolset, click the Zero-Offset Dimension Tool. 72 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Show Topography Lines
To turn off automatic dimensioning
To hide topography lines
On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Automatic Dimensioning.
On the 2D Menu, click Show Topography Lines. If there is not a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is inactive.
To hide window and door dimensions
On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Door/Window Callouts.
The Virtual Ruler

The Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure and is a handy feature for measuring items in your home plan that are not automatically dimensioned. When active, it is displayed in the middle of the window, where you can move it into any position necessary to make a needed measurement. To move the Virtual Ruler, click and drag from the center. To resize, click and drag on one of the ends, then drag.
To change the endpoint style 1 On the 2D menu, click Dimension Properties. The Dimension Properties menu is displayed.
2 Click to select the endpoint style you want to use, then click OK. To turn on the cursor dimension
On the 2D Menu, click to check Cursor Dimension. The cursor dimension is displayed in the design window.
You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Virtual Ruler can be stretched in any direction necessary. To measure using the Virtual Ruler 1 On the 2D Menu, click Show Virtual Ruler. The Virtual Ruler is displayed on the design window. 2 Click an end and drag in the direction you want to measure. The measurement is displayed in the center of the Virtual Ruler.
To turn off the cursor dimension
On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Cursor Dimension.
3 (optional) Click the center of the Virtual Ruler and drag it to a new location on the design window. Tip: Zoom in on the area you are measuring so you have a closeup view of the ruler. To hide the Virtual Ruler

On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Show Virtual Ruler. (optional) Right-click the Virtual Ruler and click Hide Virtual Ruler on the pop-up menu.
Show Topography Lines

There may be times when you will want to work on the Landscape Plan, but you may want to hide the topography lines. This is a one-click procedure. To show topography lines
Screen Colors
You can also assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D Menu.
On the 2D Menu, click Show Topography Lines. If there is a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is active.
73
Chapter
11 2D Menu
Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color. 5 (optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the luminosity. 6 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables. 7 (optional) Type Red, Green, and Blue variables. 8 Click OK. To assign a color 1 On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors. The Screen Colors dialog box is displayed.
To the color of plan layer 1 On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors. The Screen Colors dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the plan color you want to change. The Color dialog box is displayed. OR 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the plan tab you want to customize. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
2 Click the preview box for the color you want to change. The Color dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color. 3 Click the plan tab you want to customize, then click Floor Plan Color. The Color dialog box is displayed. 4 (optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the luminosity. 5 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables. 6 (optional) Type Red, Green, and Blue variables. 7 On the Screen Colors dialog box. 8 Click OK. To reset all colors
On the 2D Menu, click Screen Colors, then click Reset Colors. All colors will be reset to the default values.
4 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix.
Chapter 12
3D Menu
TurboFloorPlan lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.
Working with 2D and 3D Windows

Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush! With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on. TurboFloorPlan integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale model of any home you draw. Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to RealModel. Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates that make assembling it simple. This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction costs, before you break ground. This is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect. At some point during your design process, you will want to view your design in 3D. To display a split 2D and 3D view
Click the Split Plan/3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
To display a 3D view only
Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
75
Chapter
12 3D Menu
3 Type a new elevation measurement, in inches, then click OK.
To specify the viewpoint angle 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the design window, click the viewpoint icon and drag it to a new position. To refresh your 3D view
Note: The placement of the icon will be the point where the viewpoint originates. To view your design using Fly-Around 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Fly-Around button on the 3D View window. (alternate) On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click Fly-Around. 3 Move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 3D View window and watch the view move dynamically. To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse
Moving around in 3D
TurboFloorPlan provides interactive 3D viewing options, including the 3D Walk-Through and Fly-Around views, as well as an over-head aerial view and a room view, to focus on selected rooms in the design. Using interactive viewing, you can vary the viewing level by adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera angle can also be adjusted to provide the best viewing capabilities available. To view your design using Walk-Through 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Walk-Through button on the 3D View window. (alternate) On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click Walk-Through on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 3 Position the mouse pointer in the 3D View window, then click and drag up to move inward. 4 Position the mouse pointer in the 3D View window, then click and drag down to move outward. To change Walk-Through elevation with the mouse
Press the right mouse button down to change the viewpoint.
To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around mode 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the design window, click the center of reference icon and drag it to a new position. Note: The placement of the icon will be the point that the helicopter revolves around. To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click FlyAround Altitude. The Fly-Around Altitude dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a new elevation measurement, then click OK.
Press the right mouse button down to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.
To specify an absolute Walk-Through elevation 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click WalkThrough Elevation. The Walk-Through Elevation dialog box is displayed.
Moving around in 3D
To see an aerial or birds eye view of your design 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Aerial View button on the 3D View window. (alternate) On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click Aerial View. 3 Press your left mouse button and drag to pan or press your arrow keys to nudge the aerial view. 4 With the right mouse button down, your cursor to rotate your aerial view. To change your aerial view elevation
Press your right mouse button to toggle your aerial view elevation.
4 (optional) Press your left mouse button and drag to pan or press your arrow keys to nudge the aerial view. 5 (optional) With the right mouse button down, drag your cursor to rotate your aerial view. To adjust the 3D camera angle 1 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering, then click Rendering Options. The Rendering Options dialog box is displayed.
To see a room view of your design 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click to select the room(s) you want to view. You can use the Selection Tool in the 2D or 3D view.
2 On the Navigation & 3D Tab, adjust the Camera Angle slider. Note: You can press SHIFT while clicking to select multiple rooms in 2D. 3 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Navigation, then click Room View. The 2D and 3D views are updated to focus on the selected room(s). (optional) Click the Room View button on the 3D View window. The 2D and 3D views are updated to focus on the selected room(s). 3 Click OK. To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and WalkThrough speed 1 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering, then click Rendering Options. The Rendering Options dialog box is displayed. 2 On the Navigation & 3D Tab, adjust the Speed slider. 3 Click OK. Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.
77
Chapter
12 3D Menu
menu, or on the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Rendering Style > Framing.
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles

With TurboFloorPlans five 3D rendering options you can view your design in a variety of ways.
The Framing style displays your design to show the studs, rafters, and other framing features. Color Wireframe displays your design on a black background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the color you have defined for the Floor Plan Tab. Shaded Wireframe also displays your design on a black background. But, each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it. Using ClearView, you may see potential conflicts hidden by walls, for example, between utilities, and so on. 3D Rendering Mode must be enabled for these styles to be available. To enable 3D Rendering Mode
Note: To make framing changes, see Framing Plan Tab, which begins on page 167. To render in Color Wireframe mode 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon, or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 On 3D View, click the Render Style button, then click Render Color Wireframe from the pop-up menu or on the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Rendering Style > Color Wireframe.
On the 3D Menu, click Rendering Mode and then click 3D Rendering.
To render in Framing mode 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset, or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 On 3D View, click the Render Style button, then click Render Wireframe from the pop-up
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles
Note: While in Wireframe mode, your design will be displayed on a black background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the color you have defined for the Floor Plan Tab. To render in Textured Wireframe mode 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon, or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 On 3D View, click the Render Style button, then click Render Textured Wireframe from the popup menu or on the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Rendering Style > Textured Wireframe.
To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering 1 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering, then click Rendering Options from the pop-up menu. The Rendering Options dialog box is displayed.
Note: While in Textured Wireframe mode, your design will be displayed on a black background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it. To view a room in ClearView 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon. 2 On 3D View, click the Render Style button, then click Render ClearView from the pop-up menu or on the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Rendering Style > ClearView.
2 On the Navigation & 3D Tab, adjust the ClearView Opacity slider. Your floor plan is displayed more solidly.
To render view with materials 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.
79
Chapter
12 3D Menu
3 Click to uncheck the Optimal Quality checkbox. The slider becomes active. 4 Drag the slider to change the suns shadow quality. 5 (optional) Click to check the Optimal Quality checkbox, for highest quality. 6 Click OK. Note: A lower shadow quality speeds up rendering times, while a higher quality slows down rendering times. To adjust ambient light in 3D 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >Lighting > Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Click the 3D Lighting button on the 3D View window. 3 Under Ambient Light, drag the Intensity slider to increase or decrease the intensity. 4 Drag the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness. 5 Click OK. To adjust lighting to daytime 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >Lighting > Adjust Lighting to DayTime. All of the light fixtures are turned off, and your design is displayed as if it is daytime. To adjust lighting to nighttime
2 On 3D View, click the Render Style button, then click Shaded Textured Rendering from the pop-up menu or on the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Rendering Style > Textured.
3 (optional) Click to uncheck the Sunlight On checkbox, and bypass all of the sunlight settings. 4 Drag the Direction slider to change the direction from which the sun shines. 5 Drag the Angle slider to change the suns angle. 6 Drag the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the suns brightness. 7 Click OK. To adjust the suns shadow quality on 3D 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >Lighting > Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed. (alternate) Click the 3D Lighting button on the 3D View window.
1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Lighting > Adjust Lighting to NightTime. All of the light fixtures are turned on, and your design is displayed as if it is nighttime. To turn all light fixtures on 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >Lighting > All Light Fixtures ON. All of the light fixtures in your design turn on. To turn all light fixtures off 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >Lighting > All Light Fixtures OFF. All of the light fixtures in your design turn off.
Drawing Animation Paths
To render shadows to a 3D view 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering >3D Shadows. Note: Shadows are also rendered when the Render Final Quality selection is clicked. To control shadow quality
To change the segment display 1 Click to select the segment you want to change. Its properties are displayed under Tool Options. By default, paths display their elevation, segment time, view angle, and path name. 2 Deselect or select the display options you want.
On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering > Shadow Quality and click either High (slow) or Low (fast).
Previewing Animation Paths

At any point you can view your video. You can view it in its entirety or you can view individual animation segments. To preview Animation Segments 1 Click to select the segment(s) you want to view. Note: Hold down SHIFT and click several animation segments to select them. 2 (optional) Drag the Preview Speed slider, on the Tool Options tab, to adjust the playback speed. 3 Open a 3D view window. 4 From the 3D menu, click Animations, then click Preview Selected on the submenu. A preview of the selected animation segment(s) is displayed. Note: To stop the preview, press ESC. To preview the entire animation 1 Open a 3D view. 2 From the 3D menu, click Animations, then click Preview All on the submenu. A preview of all of the animation segments is displayed. Note: To stop the preview, press the ESC key. To set the preview speed 1 Click to select the animation segment. The Animation Path properties are displayed on the Tool Options tab. 2 Drag the Preview Speed slider to increase or decrease the playback speed.
Drawing Animation Paths

Animations allows you to define a path in 2D along which you can walk-through your design in 3D. After you place your animation path, or paths, you will be able to view your design in an automated walk-through fashion, like a movie. To draw an animation path 1 On the plan toolbar, click the Animation Path Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Animation Path properties are displayed under Tool Options. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the animation path. 3 Drag to define the path for the animation. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. 5 Right-click to end drawing mode. To remove points from an Animation Path 1 From the Edit toolset, click the Delete Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click on an Animation Path where you want to remove a point. The point is removed. 3 Continue deleting KeyPoints until you are finished, then right-click to end.
Changing the Animation Path 3D View

You can control each segments 3D position and render style to give you more flexibility, as you navigate. To change a segments position 1 Click to select the animation path segment you want to update.
81
Chapter
12 3D Menu
2 Right-click the segment and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment, from the pop-up menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment. 3 In 3D, navigate to position the view where you want it. The animation path is updated based on the view(s) youve set. 4 (optional) On the 3D menu click Animations and choose Preview Selected to preview the segment(s). To change a segments render style 1 Click to select the animation path segment you want to update. 2 Right-click the segment and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment, from the pop-up menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment. 3 Choose the render style you want for the selected segment. For more information, see Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles, which begins on page 78. Note: Animation paths that are made up of multiple segments can use a different render style for each segment. 4 The animation path is updated based on the render style(s) youve set. 5 (optional) On the 3D menu click Animations and choose Preview Selected to preview the segment(s).
Adjusting Path Curvatures

By default, paths are drawn as straight lines. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 164.
Naming and Prioritizing Animation Paths

Its easy to set the exact order of multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each path will make it easier to set their order in the final video. To name an animation path 1 On the design window, right-click the segment you want to rename and choose Animation Path Name. The Animation Path Name dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the name for the path and click OK. To reverse an animation path
On the design window, right-click the segment a you want to reverse and choose Reverse Animation Path. The animation path is reversed.
Defining Animation Path Transitions

When you define more than one animation path in your drawing, you will want to make the transition easy on the eye for the person watching your video file. With Animator you can define exactly how these transitions happen. To fade in at the beginning of a path 1 On the design window, click to select an animation path. The Animation Path properties are displayed in the Tool Options tab. 2 Select the Path Beginning checkbox. To fade out at the end of a path 1 On the design window, click to select an animation path. The Animation Path properties are displayed in the Tool Options tab. 2 .Select the Path End checkbox.
To set the order of animation paths 1 From the 3D menu, click Animations and click Change Path Order on the submenu. The Animation Paths dialog box is displayed.
2 Click a path name in the Active section to select it. 3 Click the Order arrows to change the order of the animation paths. 4 (optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Inactive menus to suppress export of specified animation paths.
Using the Decorator Palette
5 Click OK. The animation paths are reordered.
To select a color or paint

Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design. You simply load the Decorator Palette with the colors and materials you want to apply to your 3D view, then save the palette for use in later sessions. Decorator Palettes can even be exported and imported for use in different drawings. To build a palette 1 On the 3D Menu, click Decorating Options > Decorator Palette Visible. The default palette is displayed.
Right-click the color or paint and click Select Color/ Paint, from the pop-up menu. Its original library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the color or paint selected.
To select a material
Right-click the material and click Select Material, from the pop-up menu. Its original library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the material selected.
Managing Groups
You can organize the colors and materials of each room by assigning groups. Decorator Palette provides you with 15 blank group labels. To create a group 1 Select a material or color you want to add to the palette. Click and drag the color or material onto a blank palette tile. Repeat with additional materials or colors, as desired. 2 Once you have all the materials and colors you want, click the Group 1 label, then click Rename Section on the drop-down menu. The Palette Section Name dialog box is displayed.
2 Drag and drop a color or material onto a blank palette tile. Applying colors and materials from palette
Click and drag the color or material you want from the palette tile to an area of your design. Your selection is displayed in 3D View.
3 Type a name for the group in the Palette Section Name text box and click OK. The name you entered is displayed in the group label. To collapse a group
To clear a palette entry 1 Right-click the entry you want to delete and click Clear Palette Entry. 2 Click Yes at the prompt to remove the entry.
Click the group label and select Collapse Section. The group collapses and displays only its assigned name. (optional) Click the minus box on the group label.
To expand a group
Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator Palette

When youre working with a lot of different colors and materials, it can become difficult to remember the library where each appears. You can find a color or materials original library with just a few simple clicks.
Click the group label and select Expand Section. The group expands and displays your entries. (optional) Click the plus box on the group label.
To expand all groups
Click the group label and select Expand All. All of your groups expand and display your entries.
83
Chapter
12 3D Menu
To access the Palettes Organizer
To collapse all groups
Click the group label and select Collapse All. All of your groups collapse and display only their assigned names.
Click the palette menu and select Organize Palettes. The Palettes dialog box is displayed with the names of each of your palettes.
Managing Decorator Palettes

Your Decorator Palettes are saved separately from the rest of your design. That means you can use the same palette in different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes with colleagues. To save a custom palette 1 Click the palette drop-down menu and click Add Copy of Current Palette. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.
To control palette order 1 Open the Palettes Organizer. 2 Click to select the palette you want to reorder. 2 Specify your palette by typing a name in the Palette Name text box and click OK. Your palette is saved and the name of your palette is displayed. To import a custom palette 1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and click Import Palette. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the palette you want to import and click Open. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a new Palette Name if you want to, then click OK. The palette is displayed. To export a palette 1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and select Export Palette. The Save As box is displayed. 2 To select a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save. 3 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the palette. The palette is reordered. 4 Close the Palettes Organizer. To rename a palette 1 Open the Palettes Organizer. 2 Click to select the palette you want to rename. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed. 3 Type the new name in the Palette Name field and then click OK. The palette is renamed. 4 Close the Palettes Organizer. To delete a palette 1 Open the Palettes Organizer. 2 Click to select the palette you want to delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Note: At least one palette must exist. 3 Click Yes to delete the palette. The palette is deleted. 4 Close the Palettes Organizer.
Organizing Decorator Palettes

Using the Palettes Organizer you can prioritize and rename your palettes. You can also delete any palettes you do not want to keep, however at least one palette must remain.
Customizing the 3D View

There may be times when you will need to see your design without specific features, objects, and so on. With
Drawing Within the Lot
TurboFloorPlan you have complete control over what parts of your design are visible. To hide/view specific features in 3D 1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering, then click Rendering Options from the pop-up menu. The Rendering Options dialog box is displayed.
To save a 3D View 1 Using the tools described earlier in this chapter, set the 3D View window with the direction and angle that you want to save. 2 On the 3D Menu, click Saved 3D Views, then click Save 3D View. The View Name dialog box is displayed.
3 Type the name in the dialog box. Click OK. To access a saved view
3 On the Navigation & 3D Tab, click to check or uncheck the features that you want to show or hide. 4 Click OK.
On the 3D Menu, click Saved 3D Views, then click the view description on the pop-up menu. The 3D View window will display the selected view.
To update a saved view
Drawing Within the Lot

By default, drawing is restricted to the lot boundary. You can control this restriction by turning on or off the Ignore Lot When Applying option. For more information on the lot and defining the lot size, see Lot Properties, on page 61. To restrict drawing to the lot
1 Reposition the 3D view as desired. 2 On the 3D Menu, click Saved 3D Views, then click Update on the submenu.
Organizing Saved 3D Views

Using the 3D Views Organizer you can prioritize, rename, and deleted your saved 3D views. To access the 3D Views Organizer
On the 3D menu, click Decorating Options and click to select Ignore Lot When Applying. When this is enabled, the menu item is displayed with a checkmark and drawing is restricted to the lot that has been defined.
On the 3D Menu, click Saved 3D Views, then click Organize 3D Views on the submenu. The 3D Views organizer is displayed.
To turn off lot restriction while drawing
On the 3D menu, click Decorating Options and click to deselect Ignore Lot When Applying. When this is disabled, the menu item is displayed without a checkmark and the lot boundaries are ignored as you draw.
Saving a 3D View
You can save pre-set 3D View views that can be easily accessed at any time.
85
Chapter
12 3D Menu
Items youll need to construct a RealModel:

Construction material foam board or poster board Adhesive spray adhesive, rubber cement, or glue stick, and so on Tape Straight pins Straight-edge ruler Artists knife or scalpel
To open the RealModel view
On the 3D menu, click RealModel then click Show RealModel. The design is displayed in RealModel.
To control saved 3D view order 1 Open the 3D Views Organizer. 2 Click to select the view you want to reorder. 3 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the view. The view is reordered. 4 Close the 3D Views Organizer. To rename a saved 3D view 1 Open the 3D Views Organizer. 2 Click to select the view you want to rename. The View Name dialog box is displayed. 3 Type the new name in the View Name field and then click OK. The view is renamed. 4 Close the 3D Views Organizer. To delete a saved 3D view 1 Open the 3D Views Organizer. 2 Click to select the view you want to delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. 3 Click Yes to delete the view. The view is deleted. 4 Close the 3D Views Organizer.
Defining Scale
The scale you choose will define the actual size of your model. All model templates will print in this scale. For example, if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as a five-inch template. To select RealModel scale 1 Show the RealModel view. 2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel then click Model Scale. The Scale dialog box is displayed.
Preparing to Construct a RealModel

When constructing a RealModel, youll need to get a few supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby store to purchase these materials.
Setting Print Setup
To print wall templates 1 Show the RealModel view. 2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel, then click Print All Wall Templates. The Print dialog box is displayed. 3 Confirm your default printer selection, then click Print. To print roof templates 1 Show the RealModel view. 2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel, then click Print All Roof Templates. The Print dialog box is displayed. 3 Confirm your default printer selection, then click Print. 3 Click to select the scale you want then click OK. To print floor templates 1 Show the RealModel view. 2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel, then click Print Floor Template. A submenu of the floors is displayed. 3 Click the floor you want to print from the submenu. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4 Confirm your default printer selection, then click Print. To print a specific, individual template 1 Show the RealModel view. 2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel, then click Print Template. The Print Template dialog box is displayed.
Setting Print Setup

TurboFloorPlan prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed, Windowscompatible printer. Through the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. To change printer settings 1 On the File menu, click Print or press CTRL+P. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Printer Setup button, in the top left corner. The Print Setup window is displayed.
3 Type the template number you want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4 Confirm your printer settings, then click Print. 3 Click the printer you want to use. 4 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size. 5 Click OK.
Constructing Wall Templates

You will notice that some wall templates will have darker, shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting the walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this information to the template, before cutting it out. To construct a wall template 1 Attach each wall template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.
Printing RealModel Templates

The templates are used to guide you, as you build your RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached to other walls and where doors and windows are placed. Floor templates show where each wall is placed. You have the choice of printing all wall, roof, or floor templates at one time or printing each individually.
87
Chapter
12 3D Menu
3 Type the template number of the material and color you want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4 Confirm your printer settings, then click Print. Note: It is best to print and assemble the material and color on each wall, before moving on to the next wall. If you choose not to do this, you should label each material template and color, as they are printed, to make identifying them easier, when attaching them to your model.
2 Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the template. Be sure to include shaded areas. 3 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.
Constructing Roof Templates

Although your roof templates may print attached at points, cut out each roof section separately from your construction material to the exact size of the template. To construct a roof template 1 Attach each roof template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive. 2 Cut out each roof section to the exact size of the template. 3 Attach each roof template to its appropriate counterpart. 4 Secure the roof to the walls.
Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model

Once the materials and colors have been printed, you will need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick, or tape for this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to wrinkle. To attach the template materials and colors
Printing Template Materials and Colors

To add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and trimmed to size. With this process, you can see what your design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and roof on your model. To print template materials and colors 1 Show the RealModel view. Decide which material you want to print first.
1 Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has already been attached to the construction material. 2 Carefully trim around the outside edges of the wall template. 3 Cut out the door and window openings. 4 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.
2 On the 3D menu, click RealModel, then click Print Template Materials and Colors. The Print Template Textures & Colors dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 13
Window Menu
TurboFloorPlan provides several options for looking at your design onscreen. You have the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view, in 3D using 3D View, or in Elevation View.
To display 2D Plan View
Click the Plan View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction. 3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design. For more information, see Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 17.
To display Quarter 3D View
Click the Quarter 3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
To display Split Plan/3D View
Click the Split Plan/3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
Working with 2D and 3D Windows

There are two pre-set 3D View window sizes, but you are not limited to those three views. The 3D View window can be repositioned and resized to fit your requirements. All 3D View window pre-set sizes are accessible from the rightclick plan options menu.
89
Chapter
13 Window Menu
To display 3D Full View
Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
To display Elevation View
Click the Elevation icon from the collapsible view toolset.
To refresh your 3D view
Chapter 14
Help Menu
In addition to the Support button on the Task Bar, TurboFloorPlan provides many ways to get help or learn more about features of the program.
3 Click the tools Help listing on the pop-up window. Help for that feature, object, or plant is displayed. 4 (optional) Pressing F1, while many tools are active, will access the help file for that Tool.
Training Center
You can get started easily with TurboFloorPlans Training Center. It is available at all times, from the Help Menu. To access the Training Center
On the Help Menu, click Training Center.
Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup

You can toggle the initial QuickStart Help Window on and off, to suit your needs. To hide QuickStart help at Startup
Integrated Help
TurboFloorPlan includes an extensive integrated help system. This system includes all of the information found in the TurboFloorPlan Users Guide. To access the online help files
To hide the QuickStart Help Window when you launch TurboFloorPlan, click to uncheck the box on the Welcome to QuickStart Window.
On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.
To access help for a specific part of your 2D drawing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with. The Quick Access menu for that feature, object, or plant is displayed.
91
Chapter
14 Help Menu
To show QuickStart at Startup
To show QuickStart when you launch TurboFloorPlan, on the Help Menu, click Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup.
2 Click a product providers name to read information about them.
About PowerTools
You can access information about each PowerTool that is included with TurboFloorPlan. To access information about PowerTools 1 On the Help Menu, click About PowerTools. The About PowerTools dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK.
About TurboFloorPlan
You can access your serial number or check the version of your program, with one click, at any time. To access your serial number 1 On the Help Menu, click About TurboFloorPlan. The programs splash screen is displayed. 2 Click Close.
2 Click a PowerTool name to read information about it. 3 Click OK.
About Product Providers

You can access information about each manufacturer of name-brand content, for example, materials, paint, and so on. To access information about product providers 1 On the Help Menu, click About Product Providers. The About Product Providers dialog box is displayed.
Part 3
From the Ground Up

As with any actual building project, the best place to start is with the lot. The topography tools let you simulate your actual lot, then you can draw your walls and foundation features. Next, personalize your design by adding doors, windows, and so on, to create exactly the design you want. Once youve completed your home foundation and floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. TurboFloorPlan features a suite of tools so you can design these important features. The fun really begins when you start personalizing your dream homes exterior. Decks add value while landscaping adds beauty.
Chapter 15: Chapter 16: Chapter 17: Chapter 18: Chapter 19: Chapter 20: Chapter 21: Chapter 22: Chapter 23: Chapter 24: Chapter 25:
QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 15
QuickStart
For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list of individual rooms. Now you can create complex floor plans from the inside out, by laying out your home design room by room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor in just seconds, with QuickStart.
The QuickStart toolbar features eleven color-coded room types, as well as one general room type that can be customized to your wishes. Simply select your room type, place your room on the design window, and change your rooms dimensions, if you wish. When youre finished placing rooms, simply click the Continue button to update your design! To create auto-sized rooms 1 Click the corresponding button for the room type that you want to create.
2 Click on the workspace to place the room. 3 Continue to place rooms until youve created the desired design.
4 Click Continue to edit your design on the workspace. Tip: You can resize an auto-sized room by clicking on a wall and expanding it to the length you want. To control the visibility of overlapping rooms
Right-click the room you want to place in back. (optional) Double-click the room you want to place in front.
Launching QuickStart
QuickStart launches automatically upon starting the application.
To resize rooms
Adding Rooms
You can create rooms with a few simple clicks of the mouse. TurboFloorPlan allows you to use pre-designed room dimensions, customize these dimensions, or create your room from scratch.
1 Click to select the room you want. 2 Drag a corner point to resize the room. To edit your design
Click the Continue button. Your drawing opens in the design window.
95
Chapter
15 QuickStart
Controlling Drawing Settings

You can easily control the drawing space by moving from floor to floor and setting your zoom level. To work on a selected floor
Setting QuickStart Render Options

With the QuickStart rendering options, you can control the auto-roofing behavior to determine whether or not a roof is generated with your design. Additionally, you can show or hide both the roof and room ceilings while viewing a 3D preview. To generate a roof with your design 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed.
On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, then click the floor on which you want to work. (optional) Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work.
To set the zoom factor 1 On the 2D Menu, click Set Plan View Zoom. The Set Plan View Zoom dialog box is displayed. 2 Type a new zoom factor, then click OK.
2 Click to select Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart. To reset the 2D plan view
3 (optional) Click to select Show Auto-Roofing to show the auto-roof in the 3D view window. 4 Click OK. When you click Continue to open the design in the design window, a hip roof is automatically generated. Note: The roof can be edited after it has been generated. For more information, see Editing Roofs, which begins on page 133. To generate your design without a roof 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to deselect Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart and click OK. When you click Continue to open the drawing in the design window, your design does not include a roof. Note: For information on adding roofs, see Adding a Roof, on page 131. To show a roof in the 3D view 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to select Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart. The Show Auto-Roofing checkbox becomes enabled.
On the 2D menu, click Reset Plan View. Your plan is reset to the original, default view. (optional) Press CTRL+E. Your plan is reset to the original, default view.
To fit your entire design within your window
On the 2D menu, click Fit to Window. The design is fit within the design window. (optional) Press CTRL+F. The design is fit within the design window.
Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3D

As you design in QuickStart, you can see a 3D view of your design before you begin continue with your drawing in the design window. To see a 3D view in QuickStart 1 Click the Quarter 3D View icon. A 3D View is displayed. 2 Use the navigations tools, available in the 3D View toolbar, to navigate around the drawing. Note: For more information, see Moving around in 3D, which begins on page 76.
3 Click to select Show Auto-Roofing and click OK. The auto-roof is displayed in the 3D view. To hide a roof in the 3D view 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to select Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart. The Show Auto-Roofing checkbox becomes enabled. 3 Deselect Show Auto-Roofing and click OK. To show room ceilings in the 3D view 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to select Show Room Ceilings and click OK. The room ceilings are displayed in the 3D view. To hide room ceilings in the 3D view 1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to deselect Show Room Ceilings and click OK. The room ceilings are not displayed in the 3D view.
To show QuickStart at Startup
To show QuickStart when you launch TurboFloorPlan, on the Help Menu, click Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup.
Accessing the Sample Plans

Sample plans are another set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect, that can be used as-is or can be edited to your liking. There are eleven sample plans available, each with 2D and 3D previews, and room dimensions. To open a sample plan 1 Click Sample Plans on the QuickStart dialog.

You can toggle the initial QuickStart Help Window on and off, to suit your needs. To hide QuickStart help at Startup
To hide the QuickStart Help Window when you launch TurboFloorPlan, click to uncheck the box on the Welcome to QuickStart Window. 2 By default, all home styles are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the Style drop-down menu. 3 Scroll through the style options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the plans dimensions. 4 (optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see the home in 3D. 5 When you find the plan you want, click Open Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design window.
97
Chapter
15 QuickStart
Chapter 16
Foundation Plan Tab

Just like building in the real world, the best place to start is with solid foundation. The Foundation Plan Tab includes tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will learn to add stiffener beams, draw piers, and define post tension.
4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the stiffener beam to the opposite side of the foundation. 5 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode. Note: Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles. To release this constraint, hold down SHIFT, while drawing. To change the length of a stiffener beam 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the stiffener beam you want to edit. Selection handles are displayed. 3 Click an endpoint of the stiffener beam; hold down the mouse button and drag. Release the mouse button to stop lengthening the beam. To change the dimensions of a stiffener beam
Adding Stiffener Beams

Stiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You can control the length, width, and dimension of each beam. To place stiffener beams 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Stiffener Beam Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 On the Beam Tool Options, type the width and depth of stiffener beam you want. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the stiffener beam. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the beam you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the width and depth of stiffener beam you want. Press ENTER to accept new values.
Adding Foundation Piers

Foundation piers support the foundation. They are concrete pads that add strength under a support column. Even after you place piers, you can customize them. To place foundation piers 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Pier Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 On the Pier Tool Options, type the diameter of piers you want to use. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values.
2 1
2 2
99
Chapter
16 Foundation Plan Tab

3 Press the left mouse button and drag. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. 4 Release the mouse button at the point where you want the slope to stop and to end drawing mode. To change the slope direction
3 Click on the design window. A foundation pier will be placed at the location of each click.
To resize a foundation pier 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the pier you want to edit. The Pier properties are displayed on the Tool Options tab. 3 Type the new diameter of piers you want to use. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values.
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the slope you want to edit. Selection handles are displayed. 3 Drag an endpoint to the desired position to change the slope. 4 Release the mouse button to place the slope.
Adding Post Tension Strands

Post tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set in concrete. To place a post tension strand 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Posttension Tool. 2 Position your cursor where you want the posttension strand to start. 3 Press the left mouse button and drag. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
2 1
2 2
4 Release the mouse button at the point where you want the post-tension strand to stop and to end drawing mode.
Drawing the Foundation Slope

Foundation Slope is typically specified in garages or basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which direction the floor area slopes. To draw the foundation slope 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Slope Tool. 2 Position your cursor where you want the slope to start.
Chapter 17
Floor Plan Tab

By beginning with QuickStart, walls of each room are automatically generated. Customize your floor plan by adding doors, windows, stairs, and so on. TurboFloorPlan makes creating the final home plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it, simple.
Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button while the cursor is atop the start point of the first wall. Note: Drawing is constrained to 5 degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down SHIFT while drawing. Note: If you dont see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, on the 2D Menu, click Automatic Dimensioning. To draw walls to exact lengths 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall (Custom Length) Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length. 3 Release the mouse button at any point. The Custom Wall Length menu is displayed.
You can define your wall thickness, before placing, and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your design by adding windows, doors, stairs, cabinets, and so on.
Drawing Walls
QuickStart makes it easy to begin your design process, but you can add walls at any time. You can either draw free form or to specific dimensions, whichever suits your needs best. Walls are automatically joined, when you draw, and are placed at right angles. To draw walls 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length. 3 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached. 4 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that TurboFloorPlan automatically connects walls to form corners. 4 Type the length needed, then click OK. 5 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that TurboFloorPlan automatically connects walls to form corners. Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button, while the cursor is atop the start point of the first wall.
Changing Wall Segment Length

Once you have drawn walls for your design, you can easily change the length of individual wall segments. You can not
101
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab

Note: For changes to take effect, press ENTER after each change. To define stud spacing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the stud spacing required, in the dialog box. To hide all window and door dimensions
only change the length of a wall, but move an adjoining wall with the segment. To change the wall segment length 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool. 2 Click an exterior wall. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.
On the 2D Menu, click to uncheck Window/Door Callouts.
3 Type the new length in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. 4 Click Change. The wall segment is resized. 5 (optional) Click the radio button for the red dot to change the location of the left end of the wall segment, then click Change. 6 (optional) Click the radio button for the green dot to change the location of the right end of the wall segment, then click Change.
To turn off dimensions for a selected wall 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to deselect the Auto-Dim checkbox. The dimensions are removed from the selected wall. To turn on dimensions for a selected wall 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to select the Auto-Dim checkbox. The dimensions are displayed on the selected wall. 4 (optional) Select Centers or Surfaces to specify the location of the dimension. To turn off callouts for a selected wall
Setting Wall Options

Once you have drawn walls for your design, you have the option to customize many features. From wall thickness, floor height, and stud spacing to automatic flooring options, you have alternatives for almost every feature. To define wall width 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the radio button next to the width of walls you want to use. 4 (optional) Type in a custom measurement, if needed.
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to deselect the Callouts checkbox. The window/ door callouts are removed from the selected wall. To turn on callouts for a selected wall 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to select the Callouts checkbox. The window/door callouts are displayed on the selected wall. To dimension from wall surface By default, measurements are from wall center to wall center; to measure walls from surface to surface, follow these steps. 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed.
Automatic Flooring
3 Click the radio button next to Surfaces. To change dimension location 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Flip Dims button.
To remove the ceiling over a room 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the center of the room where you want to remove the ceiling. The room is highlighted in yellow and the Tool Options are displayed.
Automatic Flooring
By default, enclosed walls are drawn with a 1/4" auto-floor. You can turn the auto-floor on or off on the Tool Options tab, as well adjust its depth. To remove the auto-floor in a room 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click within an area that is enclosed by walls. Its properties are displayed on the Tool Options tab. Note: You can press SHIFT as you click to select multiple rooms at one time. 3 Click to deselect Show Floor to turn off the auto-floor. 4 (optional) Type a new value in the Depth field and then press ENTER to change the flooring depth. To add an auto-floor in a room 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click within an area that is enclosed by walls. The Tool Options are displayed. Note: You can press SHIFT as you click to select multiple rooms at one time. 3 Click to select Show Floor to turn on the auto-floor. 4 (optional) Type a new value in the Depth field and then press ENTER to change the flooring depth. To define a ceiling over the entire floor 1 Remove the ceiling from all of the rooms. For more information, see To remove the ceiling over a room, which begins on page 103. 2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Click a wall on the perimeter of the floor where you want a ceiling added. The Tool Options are displayed. Note: You can press SHIFT as you click to select multiple rooms at one time. 3 Click to deselect Show Ceiling. The ceiling is removed from the selected room.
Setting Ceiling/Floor Options

Once you have drawn walls for your design, you can customize several options. By default, TurboFloorPlan adds an individual ceiling and floor to each room. You can customize this to suit your needs; for example, to add a cathedral ceiling to the living room. You can create a soffit for the outside, define the depth of the floor, and define the ceiling options. You may also manually draw flooring, whenever it is needed. For more information, see Adding Flooring, which begins on page 114.
103
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab
4 Click the Ceiling/Floor button. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed.
4 Click the Ceiling/Floor button. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed. 5 Click the Build Floor checkbox under Floor Options. 6 Type the dimensions, in the text boxes, to define the needed floor options. 7 Click OK. The floor is built throughout the entire enclosure.
5 Check to select the Build Ceiling checkbox. The ceiling options become available. 6 (Optional) Customize any of the values, to suit your specific design needs. 7 Click OK. A ceiling is built over the entire enclosure.
To define soffit options 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. The Tool Options are displayed To define a floor for all of the room 1 Remove the floor from all of the rooms. For more information, see To remove the auto-floor in a room, which begins on page 103. 2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Click a wall on the perimeter of the floor where you want a floor added. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Ceiling/Floor button. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed. 4 Click the Build Soffits checkbox under Soffit Options. 5 Type the dimensions, in the text boxes, to define the needed soffit options. Press ENTER to accept new values.
Defining Gable Wall Segments
6 (optional) Click the radio button to join the soffit pieces, if you prefer to work with the soffit as one unit, or click the radio button for separate soffits to work with each side as a separate piece. 7 Click OK. The soffit is built on the selected wall.
3 Click the Wall Style button, then click the Gable Style on the pop-up menu. 4 Type the Base Height. The Base Height, denoted by the blue bar, will typically be your ceiling height. Press ENTER to accept new values. 5 Type Pitch A and B if you are matching a roofline. Press ENTER to accept new values. 6 Type Height - C and D (if necessary, to match your roofline). Press ENTER to accept new values. To rotate walls 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall to select it. 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the wall in the Angle text box. 5 Click OK. The wall segment or wall group you selected is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified. To rotate walls in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction. To define the wall segment length from the center 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool. 2 Click a wall. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.
Defining Gable Wall Segments

When a wall is drawn that will be roofed by a gable roof section, you can easily match the wall to the pitch of the roof. It does not matter whether you draw the roof first or alter the wall segment first. To define a gable wall segment 1 Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof; the Wall Tool Options is displayed. 2 Click the Wall Style button, then click the Gable Style on the pop-up menu. 3 Type the Base Height. The Base Height, denoted by the blue bar, will typically be your ceiling height. Press ENTER to accept new values. 4 Type Pitch - A and B to match the pitch of the roof section they will meet. Press ENTER to accept new values. 5 Type Height - C and D (if necessary, to match your roofline). Press ENTER to accept new values.
Drawing Irregular Walls

With TurboFloorPlan, you can draw diagonal walls, create gable walls, and elevate wall segments. You can create a unique floor plan with just a few clicks. To define slanted walls 1 Draw the wall(s) needed. For more information, see Drawing Walls, which begins on page 101. 2 Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof; the Wall Tool Options is displayed. The red and greet dots correspond to endpoints on the selected wall. The dot you choose is the side that is resized. 3 Select the endpoint from which you want to resize the segment, or choose Center to resize the segment from its center. 4 (optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to remain perpendicular to it. 105
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab

To draw a curved wall 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Wall Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type the Wall Segment length in the text box, then press ENTER. 3 On the design window, press the mouse button, to define one end of the circular wall segment, and drag. A rubber band line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the diameter of your curved wall. 4 Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct length. 5 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise, until the wall is the shape you want. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT to reverse the arc direction and flip the curved side. 7 Click to end and place the wall.
5 Type the length needed, then click Change. The wall segment is resized.
Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
Defining Wall Height

TurboFloorPlan makes setting an entire floors wall height easy. In addition, you can define custom wall heights for individual wall segments. To change the height of a wall 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a wall segment in your drawing. The Walls properties are displayed on the Tool Options tab. 3 Type a new height in the Wall Height field (blue bar) and then press ENTER to accept the new value. The wall height is updated. To change the height of an entire floor 1 On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights. The Default Ceilings dialog box is displayed.
Placing a Room Addition

Using the Room Addition Tool, you can add space to your design with just two mouse clicks. Quickly add space then edit the room along with the rest of your design, or customize the room addition settings first, and then place a complete room that is ready for finishing touches. To place a room addition 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Room Addition Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Click the Settings button to edit the room addition options. For more information, see Changing Room Addition Settings, which begins on page 106. 3 Click and drag along an existing wall to position the addition where you want it, on the side of the wall where you want it placed, and release to place the room addition. The addition is placed based on the current room addition setting. Once placed, you can edit the walls, doors, windows, and roof just as any other part of your drawing.
2 Type a new height measurement in the text box corresponding to the floor you want to change, then click OK. Note: Changing the ceiling height this way will cause subsequently-drawn walls to be at the new height. If walls were drawn before setting the new wall height, they will need to be individually changed.
Changing Room Addition Settings

The Room Addition Settings are applied to subsequent rooms that are placed using the tool. Once a room addition is placed, it can be edited just as any other part of the drawing. To edit room addition wall settings 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Room Addition Tool. The Tool Options are displayed.
Drawing a Curved Wall

With TurboFloorPlan, you can easily add curved walls. You could even draw a round house!
Breaking a Wall
2 Click the Settings button. The Room Addition Options dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the Walls tab. The Walls options are displayed.
7 (optional) Select the Add Interior Opening checkbox to add an opening between the existing wall and the room addition. 8 Click OK and then place the room addition. To edit room addition roofing settings 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Room Addition Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Settings button. The Room Addition Options dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the Roofing tab. The Roofing options are displayed.
4 In the Room Shape section, click the room addition shape you want. A preview of your selection is displayed. 5 In the Room Sizing section, type the room dimensions. Notice, each field corresponds with a letter in the preview image. 6 (optional) Deselect the Use adjacent wall height checkbox if you want to specify a wall height that is different from the existing structures walls. 7 Click OK and then place the room addition. To edit room addition window and door settings 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Room Addition Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Settings button. The Room Addition Options dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the Windows and Doors tab. The Windows and Doors options are displayed. 4 In the Roof Style section, click the type of roof you want. A preview of your selection is displayed. 5 In the Roof Options section, type the soffit depth, gable soffit, and pitch you want in the corresponding text fields. 6 (optional) Select the Use auto roofing settings if available checkbox to use the automatic roof settings that have been set. 7 (optional) If the room addition is being placed along a wall that is higher than the addition (a two-story structure, for example), you can select the Clip roof at wall checkbox so the additions roof stops at the adjacent wall. 8 Click OK and then place the room addition.
Breaking a Wall
With TurboFloorPlan, its easy it easy to fine tune your rooms, adding an inset, for example. 4 In the Window Style section, click the style of windows for the walls. A preview of your selection is displayed. 5 In the Door Style section, click the type of door for the room. A preview of your selection is displayed. 6 (optional) Select the exterior door position. Notice, each field corresponds with a letter in the preview image. To break a wall 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Break Tool. 2 On the design window, click a wall where you want to position a break.
107
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab

To change door type 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the door you want to modify. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Door Style button, then click the door style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed. To resize a door by specifying dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the door you want to modify. The The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them. Press ENTER to accept new values. To resize a door by dragging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a door to select it. The The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the door, drag the endpoint to resize the door, then release the mouse button.
3 (optional) Hold the mouse button down and move it back and forth to position the break, using associative dimensioning. Note: To remove a section of wall, click twice, to make two break points, then click to select that section and press DELETE.
Adding Doors and Openings

All doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are three types of openings and nine door styles available in TurboFloorPlan and they are all placed in the same manner. To add a door 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Door Style button, then click the door style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed. 3 On the design window, click a wall where you want to place a door.
To flip the direction of a door 4 (optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary. 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the door you want to modify. The The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Flip Door button. The door flips direction. To change door swing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 5 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them. 6 Type the Door Swing Angle, if necessary. Note: Any changes made on the Tool Options tab become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed. 2 Click the door you want to modify. The The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new door swing angle and press ENTER. The door swing updates. To change the elevation of a door 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a door to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type a new elevation in the Elevate text box and then press ENTER.
Changing Door Settings

There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of its features through the Custom Door Tool Options.
Adding Door Hardware
4 (optional) Use the Object Elevation field, at the top of the design window, raise or lower the selected door into position.
4 On the Double Door Preview Bar, click the left door. Note: Right and left doors are placed individually. 5 On the design window, click a wall where you want to place a door. 6 Click to set the door swing. 7 Repeat steps 4-6 for the right door. Overlap them slightly to minimize the center post.
Adding Door Hardware

Door hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. TurboFloorPlan has an extensive library of hardware. To add door hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the door where you want to add hardware. The The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the plus sign next to Hardware. A list of options is displayed. Click the option you want to use. 4 Click the Door Hardware button, then click to select which hardware you want to use. The hardware is added to the door and displayed in 3D View. To remove door hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the door where you want to remove hardware. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Door Hardware button, then click No Hardware on the pop-out menu. The hardware is removed from the door and the 3D View is updated.
Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in TurboFloorPlan. They are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are 19 window styles available in TurboFloorPlan and they are all placed in the same manner. To add a window 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 click the Window Style button, then click the window style you want from the popup window that is displayed. 3 On the design window, click a wall where you want to place a window.
Adding Double Doors

Double doors add an elegant look to any room. To simulate French Doors, use glass doors instead of the wooden ones used in this example. To draw double doors 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Door Style button, then click the Custom Door style at the bottom of the list. The Door Preview Bar is displayed. 3 Click the arrow next to Doors at the top of the Preview Bar to display the door library list, then click Double Doors. Available double doors are displayed in the Preview Bar. 4 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them. 5 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture windows, specify the grill spacing. Note: Any changes made on the Window Tool Options become the default and will be used the next time a window is placed.
109
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab

To change the grill settings of a window 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Double Hung or Casement/ Picture window style. The Grill settings control is displayed. Note: The Grill settings dialog will appear only when a Double Hung or Casement/ Picture window is selected. 4 Using the scroll bars in the Grill section of the dialog box, adjust the grill appearance. The new grill settings are applied.
Changing Window Settings

Once windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them. You can do this by specifying exact dimensions, or by dragging one end, until you have the required size. You have control over the look of your windows by changing the grill settings. You can also flip windows vertically or horizontally to create beautiful groupings to suit any room design. To resize a window by specifying dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a window to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them. Press ENTER to accept new values. To resize a window by dragging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a window to select it. 3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the window, drag the endpoint until the window is the size you want, then release the mouse button.
Elevating a Window
TurboFloorPlan makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Object Elevation field makes it almost a oneclick process. To elevate a window 1 Place windows, using the technique outlined in Adding Windows, on page 109. 2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Click to select a window. The Tool Options are displayed.
Changing Window Pitch

Some window styles offer a pitch setting that can be adjusted to match the pitch of a wall. To change a window pitch 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the Pitch you want and press ENTER to accept the value. The window is updated. To flip a window 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select a window. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click one of the flip buttons. Note: Flip is not available if a Double Hung or Casement/ Picture window is selected.
4 Type a new elevation in the Elevate text field. Press ENTER to accept new values. (optional) Type the elevation you want in the Object Elevation field, at the top of the design window, and press ENTER to raise or lower the selected window into position. 5 Continue selecting and elevating windows until the look you want is achieved.
Stacking Windows
TurboFloorPlan makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Object Elevation field makes it almost a oneclick process.
Adding Accessories
To stack windows 1 Place windows using the technique outlined in the Adding Windows, on page 109. 2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Click to select to be elevated. The Tool Options are displayed. 4 Elevate the window using one of the techniques in Elevating a Window, on page 110. Nudge the window using your arrow keys, if needed. 5 Continue placing and elevating windows, until the look you want is achieved. Note: Stacked windows will appear on top of one another in the 2D design window. To easily select individual stacked windows, see Selecting Features in 3D, which begins on page 22.
3 On the Preview Bar, click the accessory you want to place. 4 On the design window, drag along a wall where you want to place the accessory and release to place.
5 Click to select the accessory. The Tool Options are displayed. 6 Type the Width, Height, Wall Offset, and Elevation to customize them.
Adding Accessories
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and so on, to any window. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls. To add accessories 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Accessory Tool. The Accessories library is displayed on the Furnishings tab. 2 (optional) Click the Accessories Library drop-down menu to display the accessory library list, then click Blinds. Available blinds are displayed in the Preview Bar. 7 (optional) To create a sheer effect, set the translucency. 8 (optional) To automatically size the accessory, click the Auto/Size button, then click the window. The accessory will automatically fit to the dimensions of that window.
Nudging Wall Attachments

You can nudge wall attachments using the arrow keys. To nudge wall attachments 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the wall attachment you want to nudge. 3 Press the left or right arrow key to nudge the selection in that direction.
Adding a Second Floor

With TurboFloorPlan you can create a home design with up to three stories. Once youve completed your foundation and other first floor features, you can begin adding upper stories to your home design. For more information on foundation design, refer to the chapter titled Foundation Plan Tab, which begins on page 99.
111
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab
To copy all exterior walls from the first floor to the second 1 On the Foundation tab, uncheck any other plan layers you may have selected to view simultaneously. 2 Press SHIFT, while clicking each exterior wall, until they are all selected. 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, then Upper Floor. All exterior walls are copied to the second floor. Note: For further information about drawing on multiple floors, see the chapter titled Edit Menu, which begins on page 53, and the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 17.
Placing a Staircase
As you create more than one floor in your design, youll want to draw a staircase. As you are placing stairs, TurboFloorPlan displays the stair length, so you know the exact measurements, as you draw. To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see Adding a Floor Cutout, which begins on page 114. After youve drawn your staircase, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles, posts, and handrails. To draw a straight staircase 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.
Creating a Split Level

With TurboFloorPlans elevation settings, you can easily design a split level home. With one or two mouse clicks, your split level can be perfectly positioned. To create a split level 1 On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Work on First Floor. 2 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Tool from the collapsible toolset. Using the techniques outlined in the section Drawing Walls, on page 101, draw one side of your split-level design. This can be the lower level or the upper level, but for this example it will be the lower level. 3 Click the Selection Tool, on the Edit Toolbar, and drag a selection window around the entire enclosure to select all of the walls. 4 In the Object Elevation field at the top of the design window, type the elevation at which you want the floor to be positioned. This should be a negative value. For example, -8-0. 5 Press ENTER. The enclosure is repositioned at the elevation you specified. 6 Click the Wall Tool and draw another enclosure, the upper level.
2 2
2 1
4 (optional) Press SHIFT while drawing to release the 15 degree constraint. To draw a curved staircase 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click and release on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click to place the staircase.
Modifying a Staircase
2 Right-click the centerline of the staircase you want to alter. 3 Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is reversed. Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.
2 1
2 2
Customizing Staircase features 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the staircase you want to customize, to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 In the Staircase section, type the Height and Width you want. Press ENTER to accept new values. 4 (optional) Select Skirt Walls to add skirt walls. 5 In the Step section, type the Height (riser) and Depth (tread) you want. Press ENTER to accept new values. 6 (optional) Select Open to create an open space between each step. 7 In the Handrails section, type the Height you want. Press ENTER to accept new values. 8 (optional) Click to select the handrails side(s) you want to include (looking up from bottom of staircase).
4 (optional) Press SHIFT while drawing to constrain stairs to a perfect arc. To create a landing 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 Click where you want the landing. 4 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.
5 Nudge points into position to refine the look of the landing. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT while drawing to release the 15 degree constraint.
Adding Railings
After drawing a staircase, youll need to draw a railing around the opening to provide a barrier. To draw a straight railing 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Railing Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the Railing. A rubber band railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 (optional) Press SHIFT while drawing to release the 15 degree constraint. 4 Extend the Railing to the location you want, then double-click to end drawing mode.
Modifying a Staircase
Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With TurboFloorPlan you have control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, handrail height and placement, and whether the stairs are open or enclosed. Reversing the direction of a staircase 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
113
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab

pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
To draw a curved railing 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Railing Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber band railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set. 3 (optional) Press SHIFT while drawing to constrain railing to a perfect arc. 4 Extend the railing to the location you want, then doubleclick to end drawing mode.
3 Click and drag the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring area. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode and place the floor.
Modifying a Railing
Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify its features. To customize railing features 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the railing you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the handrail height you want. 4 Type the baluster spacing you want. 5 (optional) Click to select Post to include posts in the railing. Note: Press ENTER to accept new values.
To reshape flooring 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a side of the flooring you want to reshape. 3 Click a cornerpoint of the flooring; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag. 5 (optional) Click a side of the flooring to move the two cornerpoints at once. To add a flooring description 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a segment of the floor you want to edit and choose Floor Description. The Floor Description dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a description of the floor section and click OK.
Adding Flooring
Whether you want to carpet the whole floor with one color or you want each room to have an individual feel, TurboFloorPlan helps you experiment with different flooring options, before spending hundreds of dollars on something youre not happy with. Once drawn, you can customize the flooring by applying materials like tile, carpet, wood, and so on. For more information, see Applying Building Materials, which begins on page 31. To draw flooring 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. Note: If necessary, you can turn off the automatic flooring option. Click an exterior wall, uncheck the Auto-Floor option under Tool Options. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the flooring. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the 114 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Adding a Floor Cutout

TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to design lofts, creative staircase openings, and so on. You can also easily convert that space over the garage to a versatile room. To draw a floor cutout 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Cutout Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the floor cutout. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
Adding Cabinets
3 Click and drag the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the floor cutout area. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode and place the cutout. 5 (optional) To customize the thickness of the cutout, type a new thickness under Tool Options. To reshape a floor cutout 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a side of the floor cutout you want to reshape. 3 Click a cornerpoint of the floor cutout; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag. 5 (optional) Click a side of the floor cutout to move the two cornerpoints at once. To auto-elevate a cutout to an existing floor 1 Click to select the floor to which you want the cutout elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the cutout you want elevated. Note: Both the floor and the cutout must be selected. 3 Right-click a segment of the cutout you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected floor. The cutout is elevated to the floor you selected.
To create a custom cabinet 1 Click the Cabinet Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Cabinet button and choose the surface or component you want to customize. The properties are displayed. 3 Type the dimensions you want. Be sure to press ENTER to accept each new value. 4 Click and drag along the wall where you want the cabinet and release to place. To add an island 1 Click the Cabinet Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click on the workspace where you want the island. The island is displayed. To edit an islands style 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the island. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Island Styles button and choose the style you want. The island is changed.
Customizing Cabinet Dimensions

You can easily edit a cabinet after youve placed it in your drawing. From resizing base doors to adding additional drawers, each aspect of a cabinet is customizable. To access the different faces and components of a cabinet, click the Cabinet component button. To edit a cabinet in your drawing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Adding Cabinets
Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch. There are many cabinet styles available and each cabinets dimensions are customizable. To add cabinets 1 Click the Cabinet Tool. The Tool Options are displayed with different cabinet options. 2 Click the Cabinet Style button and choose the style of cabinet you want. 3 Click and drag along the wall where you want to place the cabinet and release to place.
115
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab
2 Select the cabinet you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet button and choose the cabinet component you want to customize. The Properties are displayed. 4 Type the values you want in the corresponding text fields. Be sure to press ENTER to accept each new value.
Building Rooms Using Templates

TurboFloorPlan includes dozens of room templates, which will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the template that suits your needs best. To place a template 1 Click the Templates tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates; by default Kitchens are shown. 2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Room Library drop-down menu to display the room libraries, then click another library. 3 Scroll to view the available templates.
Adding Cabinet Hardware

Cabinet hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. TurboFloorPlan has an extensive library of hardware. To add hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the design window, click the cabinet to which you want to add hardware. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet button and choose the surface for the hardware. Its properties are displayed. 4 Under Hardware, click the Hardware Library button and choose the the Pulls of Knobs library. 5 Click the Hardware Style button, then click to select which hardware you want to use. The hardware is added to the surface and displayed in the 3D view. To remove door hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the design window, click the cabinet to from which you want to remove hardware. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet button and choose the surface from which you want to remove hardware. 4 Under Hardware, click the Hardware Library button and choose the the Pulls of Knobs library. 5 Click the Hardware Library button then scroll to the bottom and choose No Hardware. The hardware is removed.
4 Click the template you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window. 5 (optional) Click the Selection Tool, then click the template you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window. To choose a new category 1 Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates. 2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Room Library drop-down menu to display the room libraries, then click another library. 3 Scroll to view the available templates. 4 Click the template you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window.
Creating New Templates

With TurboFloorPlan you can easily create room templates to suit your specific needs. To create a template 1 Once your room is designed exactly to your liking, select all walls, doors, and other features that you want to include in your template. 2 Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates.
Creating New Templates
3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Template Library drop-down menu, then click Create Template. The Save Template to Category dialog is displayed.
4 Click to choose the Template Category, then select the appropriate category from the expanded list, if needed. 5 Type a Template Name. 6 Type a Template Description, then click Save To Library. The template is added to that category and displayed in the Preview Bar.
117
Chapter
17 Floor Plan Tab
Chapter 18
Electrical Plan Tab

Adding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place and clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off!
To place outlets and switches 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click one of the outlet or switch tools on the collapsible toolset.
TurboFloorPlan provides handy placement features, such as associative dimensioning and wall tracking. Using associative dimensioning, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring wall or other electrical component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components, such as outlets and switches, without error.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. Dimensions will display, as you drag the outlet or switch along the wall. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the outlet or switch to the nearest wall or other electrical component.
Placing Outlets and Switches

TurboFloorPlan makes it simple to add electrical components to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the components you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place components a specific distance from a neighboring electrical component or wall segment. Youll notice that when placing certain outlets and switches, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to walls. If the outlet is to be placed within 6" of a water source, for example, in a kitchen, bath, or outdoors, always use a GFI outlet. Ground Fault Interrupters are designed to shut themselves off, if they get wet. Gang switches are designed to have multiple switches, that control multiple lights, ceiling fans, and so on. 3 Release the mouse button to place the outlet or switch.
Note: To place a 4-Way or 5-Way switch, click the 3-Way switch button on the Switch Style Preview Bar and click the needed switch on the pop-up window that is displayed. To place ceiling or floor outlets 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the 110 or the 220 Ceiling/Floor Outlet Tool on the collapsible toolset.
119
Chapter
18 Electrical Plan Tab
2 On the Preview Bar, click either a Floor Outlet or a Ceiling Outlet. 3 Click on the design window to place the outlet. To move a ceiling or floor outlet by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the outlet you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 6 The outlet is moved to the location you specified. To place a gang switch 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click one of the Gang Switches on the collapsible toolset. To move connector switches by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the connector switch you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 2 On the Preview Bar, click the type of switch you want to place. 3 Click on the design window to place the switch. 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 6 The connector is moved to the location you specified. 3 Click the ceiling fan or light you want to connect. The wiring is displayed in your drawing.
Adding Fixture Lighting

Adding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to adding other electrical components; however, they do not track directly to walls or automatically display dimensioning. TurboFloorPlan provides many lights to choose from, including recessed canned lights, heat/vent lights, and so on. In addition, you can control the amount of illumination that each fixture generates. To add light fixtures 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Light Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed.
Adding Connector Switches

Its easy to add connector switches to your home design. Using the Connector Switch Tool, just click and drag to define the connection. To place connector switches 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Connector Switch Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The wiring is displayed, as you drag.
Adding Fixture Lighting
2 (optional) Click the Light Style button to access a different light style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 3 Click once in your plan drawing to place each light.
4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. To dim the lights 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to dim. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the left and right arrows on the Dimmer scroll bar or move the slider to customize the brightness of the lights.
Note: A lighting fixture will be placed at each click site. Right-click or select a different tool to end placing light fixtures. To move a light fixture by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the light fixture you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 6 The light fixture is moved to the location you specified. To turn the lights on and off 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to turn on or off. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to check or uncheck Beam and/or Ambient. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. 4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab.
4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. To set the radius of the lights 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the left and right arrows on the Radius scroll bar or move the slider to customize the radius of the lights. 4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. To set the falloff from the lights 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to adjust. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the left and right arrows on the Falloff scroll bar or move the slider to customize the Falloff of the lights. 4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. To set the glow dimmer 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to adjust. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the left and right arrows on the Glow Dimmer scroll bar or move the slider to customize the lights Glow Dimmer. 4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window.
(alternate) On the 3D Menu, click 3D Rendering, then Lighting, and then click All Light Fixtures ON, or All Light Fixtures OFF.
To turn glow on and off 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture for which you want to turn glow on or off. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to check or uncheck Glow.
121
Chapter
To set the glow size 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the light fixture you want to adjust. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the left and right arrows on the Glow Size scroll bar or move the slider to customize the Glow Size. 4 Click Apply on the Tool Options tab. The change is displayed in the 3D View window. To move a ceiling fan by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the ceiling fan you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 6 The ceiling fan is moved to the location you specified.
Adding Flood Lights

Flood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which can be turned off and on, is displayed in 3D View. You can change the flood lights elevation or position after it has been placed. To add a flood light 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Flood Light Tool. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. Dimensions will display, as you drag along the wall. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the light to the nearest wall or other electrical component.
Placing Phone and Cable Jacks

Placing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. Youll notice that when placing jacks, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place phone and cable jacks 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Phone or Cable Jack Tool on the collapsible toolset.
3 Release the mouse button to place the flood light.
Adding a Ceiling Fan

Placing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates. To place a ceiling fan 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Ceiling Fan Tool. Ceiling fan options are displayed on the Preview Bar. 2 Click to select the ceiling fan you want to place. 3 Click on your plan drawing to place the ceiling fan. 3 Release the mouse button to place the phone or cable jack. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The phone or cable jack is displayed with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the jack to the nearest wall or other electrical component.
Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats
Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats

Placing smoke detectors and thermostats is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. Youll notice that, when placing these components, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place smoke detectors and thermostats 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Smoke Detector or Thermostat Tool. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The smoke detector or thermostat is displayed with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the smoke detector or thermostat to the nearest wall or other electrical component.
Elevating to a floors base or surface

You can set an objects elevation to match that of a floors base or surface. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as elevating lights to a ceiling or receptacles to a floor or ceiling. To elevate an object to a floors surface 1 Click to select the floor to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated. Important: Both the floor and the object must be selected. 3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected floors surface. The object is elevated to the top surface of the floor you selected. To elevate to a floors base
3 Release the mouse button to place the smoke detector or thermostat.
1 Click to select the floor to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated. Important: Both the floor and the object must be selected. 3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected floors base. The object is elevated to the bottom surface of the floor you selected.
Adding a Battery Power Supply

Placing a battery power supply, or uninterruptible power supply (UPS), is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place the UPS, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates. To place a battery power supply 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Battery Power Supply Tool. 2 Click on your plan drawing to place the battery power supply.
Nudging Wall Attachments

You can nudge wall attachments using the arrow keys. To nudge wall attachments 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the wall attachment you want to nudge. 3 Press the left or right arrow key to nudge the selection in that direction.

You can control a variety of drawing settings on the Design menu. When working within multiple floors, it is important to have control of your ceiling heights, working floor and to be sure youre at the correct working elevation.
Note: Rotate the battery power supply as needed.
123
Chapter

3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level. To move objects using the Nudge feature 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object to select it. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right). Tip: You can also nudge your design by using the arrows on your
keyboard.
To set the working elevation 1 On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the Working Elevation you want in the text box and click OK. To set ceiling heights 1 On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights. The Default Ceiling Heights dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the height you want the first floor ceiling to be, in the First Floor text box. 3 Type the height you want the second floor ceiling to be, in the Second Floor text box. 4 Type the height you want to third floor ceiling to be, in the Third Floor text box. 5 Click OK. To work on a selected floor
To move an object or entity a specified amount 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want moved. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move or double-click the Selection Tool. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type the amount you want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes. 5 Click OK. The object is moved, based on the coordinates you specified. Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To freely rotate an entity
On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work. (alternate) To work on the first floor, press CTRL+1. (alternate) To work on the second floor, press CTRL+2. (alternate) To work on the third floor, press CTRL+3.
Editing Your Design

TurboFloorPlan provides you with editing tools to help you modify your interior floor plan. You must select the object(s) you want to edit before clicking on the Edit menu. To copy an object from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want duplicated. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level. Note: The first floor is set as your default working floor. To move objects from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want moved. To select more than one, press SHIFT while clicking.
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want to rotate. 3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. 4 Click the entity; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the entity to rotate. Degree of rotation will appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. Press SHIFT to release the 45 degree constraint. 5 Release the mouse button. To rotate by specifying an amount 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want rotated. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.
Editing Your Design
5 Click OK. The object is rotated based on the angle measurement you specified. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT then press the left to right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction. To flip an object or entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want flipped. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal. The object is flipped. To mirror a an object or entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want mirrored. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical or Mirror Horizontal. The object is mirrored.
125
Chapter
Chapter 19
Plumbing Plan Tab

Once youve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. TurboFloorPlan features a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and floor drain placement, also included in TurboFloorPlan. Most plumbing objects are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and dimensions appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing symbol is simple to include in your drawing, with the flexibility to modify it at any time.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The hose bib is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the hose bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
3 Release the mouse button to place the hose bib.
To place a gas bib 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Gas Bib Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The gas bib is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the gas bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib

When you place an outdoor hose bib or a gas bib, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or the end of a wall segment. Youll notice that when placing hose bibs, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place an outdoor hose bib 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hose Bib Tool on the collapsible toolset.
3 Release the mouse button to place the gas bib.
127
Chapter
19 Plumbing Plan Tab

To place sinks 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Sink Tool. Sink options are displayed on the Preview Bar. 2 Click on the Preview Bar to select the sink you want to place. 3 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The sink is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.
Adding Floor Drains

Once youve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is to add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as simple as a mouse click. To add a floor drain 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Floor Drain Tool. 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The floor drain is placed.
4 Release the mouse button to place the sink.
Placing Toilets
TurboFloorPlan makes it simple to add plumbing to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the fixtures you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or wall segment. Youll notice that, when placing toilets, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place toilets 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Toilet Tool. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The toilet is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the toilet to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.
To move a sink 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the sink you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 Drag the sink to a new location. As you move the sink, associative dimensioning is displayed. 4 Release the mouse button to place the sink in the new location.
Placing Bathtubs
In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a tub, TurboFloorPlan automatically adds annotation to your design, once the tub is placed. This makes reading home plans, at a later date, simple. If you dont find the exact sized tub you are looking for, simply place a tub that is similar in size, then adjust the tub or spa properties to the exact size you want for your home design. To place a bath tub 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Bath Tub Tool. Tub options are displayed on the Preview Bar.
3 Release the mouse button to place the toilet.
Placing Sinks
As with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall segments, as you place them, as well as automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures.
2 Click on the Preview Bar to select the tub you want to place. 3 On the design window, click on the wall where you want to place a tub. The dimension lines indicate the
Placing a Shower
distance from the center of the tub to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture. 4 Drag the tub along the wall, until it is in position.
3 On the design window, click where you want to place a shower. The shower, with dimensions, is displayed. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the shower to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture. 4 Drag the shower along the wall until it is in position.
5 Release the mouse button to place the tub. Notice annotation is automatically displayed on the tub symbol. 5 Release the mouse button to place the shower. Notice annotation is automatically displayed on the shower symbol.
To resize a bath tub 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the bath tub to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type a new bath tub length in the Length text box. 4 Type a new width in the Width text box. Note: Press ENTER to accept the values. The bath tub is resized. To switch the faucet location 1 Click the tub to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click Flip to change the location of the faucet to the other side of the tub.
To resize a shower 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the shower to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type a new shower length in the Length text box. 4 Type a new width in the Width text box. Note: Press ENTER to accept the values. The shower is resized. To switch the faucet location 1 Click the shower to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click Flip to change the location of the faucet to the other side of the shower.
Placing a Shower
Showers are placed in the same manner as bath tubs. In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a shower, TurboFloorPlan automatically adds annotation to your design, once the shower is placed. If you dont find the exact sized shower you are looking for, simply place a shower that is similar in size, then adjust the shower properties to the exact size you want for your home design. To place a shower 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Shower Tool. Shower options are displayed on the Preview Bar. 2 Click on the Preview Bar to select the shower you want to place.
Placing the Hot Water Heater

Adding a hot water heater to your home plan is as simple as a mouse click. To add a hot water heater 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hot Water Heater Tool. 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The hot water heater is placed.
129
Chapter
19 Plumbing Plan Tab
Chapter 20
Roofing Plan Tab

One of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in TurboFloorPlan, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones, like saltbox, gambrel, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your home plan.
To turn off the auto roof generation 1 Move the cursor over the outer walls of your design until you see a light blue highlighted perimeter. Click the perimeter. After selection, it will become yellow. 2 Under Tool Options, click Options. The Auto-Roofing menu is displayed. 3 Uncheck the box for automatically generated panels. To draw a manual roof 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click a Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options displays the pitches that are available.
Adding a Roof
There are several styles of roof available in TurboFloorPlan, including three powerful freehand roofing tools. To match the gable ends of these roof styles, refer to Defining Gable Wall Segments, on page 105. To draw a flat ceiling, instead of a cathedral one, see Setting Ceiling/Floor Options, on page 103. Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact placement. While there are nine roof tools available, six of them are placed in the same manner. These styles are:

2 Click the roof pitch to select it. 3 (optional) On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof), or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
hip gable connector gable hip connector hip/gable cross connector
4 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag.
131
Chapter
20 Roofing Plan Tab

2 On the Tool Options, click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the dialog box. 3 (optional) Type a Pitch Angle in the dialog box. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the roof section. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse button.
5 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section. 6 (optional) Click to select the arrow in the center of the roof section, then rotate the bold arrow to change the direction of the roof slope. Note: The arrows show which way the roof section descends. The elevation of each corner is noted.
Using the Freehand Roof Tools

TurboFloorPlan has three Freehand Roof tools that provide versatility and power, when drawing complex roofing plans. Using the three-point and four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls, making it easy to draw them the necessary size the first time. After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized, for example, pitch, placement, shape, and so on. With the three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width for soffit. To draw with the freehand roof tool 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Freehand Roof Tool. The Roofs Tool Options displays the pitches that are available.
Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match roof sections. 7 Click the roof section to select it. The Tool Options displays the pitches that are available. 8 Click the Elevation Base radio button to measure from the ground to the base of the roof section. 9 Click the Elevation Peak radio button to measure from the ground to the peak of the roof section. 10 (optional) Adjust the elevation of the roof section, using the Object Elevation field at the top of the design window.
Using the Dormer Cutout Tool
To draw with the four-point freehand roof tool 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the Custom text field. Press ENTER to accept manually entered values. 3 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. 4 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn.
Using the Dormer Cutout Tool

A cutout tool is available for creating dormers on roofs. The tool is similar to other cutout tools available. To cut out a roof for a dormer 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Dormer Cutout Tool. 2 Be sure you are on the same floor as the roof. Click to start the cutout and drag to the next point. 3 Click to set the next point and continue to drag and click points to create the shape you want. 4 Right-click to finish. The roof section is cut out.
5 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn. To draw with the three-point freehand roof tool 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the Custom text field. Press ENTER to accept manually entered values. 3 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. 4 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
Editing Roofs
Once drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design. From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch, TurboFloorPlan makes it simple to create even the most complex roofline. To resize the roof 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a side of the roof to select it. 3 Click a cornerpoint of the roof; hold down the mouse button and drag it, until the roof is the size you want. 4 Release the mouse button. To change the roofs pitch 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
133
Chapter
20 Roofing Plan Tab
2 Click a side of the roof to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the text field. Press ENTER to accept manually entered values. Note: To create a flat roof, click Custom and type 0.0 in the test field. To change the roofs slope direction 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a side of the roof to select it. 3 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section, until it points to the direction you want the section to fall. 4 Release the mouse. The slope is repositioned. Note: Rotation is constrained to fifteen (15) degrees. 4 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Tool on the collapsible toolset. 5 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length. 6 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached. 7 On the Tool Options, enter the height of the wall. In this example, the gable wall is four feet high, with a pitch of 10:12. 8 Use the Object Elevation field to exactly position the gable wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 21'-0".
Drawing a Dormer
Dormers are windows set into small gables, used to add light and space to the top floor of a building, typically the attic. Dormers are more easily applied after the roof has been completed. In the following example, the dormer itself is drawn on the third floor, while the Dormer Cutout is drawn on the second floor. The Dormer Cutout Tool must be applied to a roof object. To draw a dormer 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable Connector Roof Tool. The Roofs Tool Options displays the pitches that are available. 2 Click the roof pitch to select it. In this example, we are using 10:12. 3 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag the Dormer roof to the shape needed.
9 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Tool on the collapsible toolset. 10 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length. 11 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached. In this example, the side walls are only seven inches long. 12 On the Tool Options, enter the dimensions of the side wall. In this example, the side wall is one inch high, tapering to a height of four feet, with a pitch of 10:12. 13 Use the Object Elevation field to exactly position the gable wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 21'-0".
Adding a Skylight
Adding a Skylight
Skylights are windows cut into the roof. They add a touch of elegance, in addition to letting in more natural light.
14 Repeat steps 9 through 13 for the opposite side wall. 15 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 16 (optional) Click the Window Style button, then click the window style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed and type the window dimensions you want. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values. 17 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a window.
To add a skylight 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Skylight Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the Skylight Style button, then click a Skylight Style on the pop-up menu. 3 (optional) Click the Custom Skylight option to see a listing of the available custom skylights. 4 Click a roof section on the design window to define the placement of the skylight.
Drawing a Gambrel Roof

The Gambrel, or barn, roof is a popular style because it increases the usable space in the loft/attic area. A gambrel roof is composed of two pitches. The lower sections are created using the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool, while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof Tool. To draw a gambrel roof 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the 12:12 pitch option. 3 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. 4 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
18 (optional) On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof), or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 19 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Dormer Cutout Tool. 20 Trace the Dormer Roof, leaving some space at the end where the dormer connects to the roof.
135
Chapter
20 Roofing Plan Tab
5 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn. 6 On the Edit menu, click Copy. (alternate) Press CTRL+C. (alternate) Right-click the selection and click Copy on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 7 On the Edit menu, click Paste. A duplicate roof section is created. (alternate) Press CTRL+V. (alternate) Right-click the selection and click Paste on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 8 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section 180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow. 9 Align this roof section on the other side of the floor plan. Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper elevation of the roof section.
14 Type the number noted from Step 11. Note: The previous example specified 12:12 and 4:12 pitches, but any combination of pitches will work for this roof.
Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style, use a combination of the Wall Break Tool and Gable Wall segments. For more information, see Breaking a Wall, which begins on page 107 and Defining Gable Wall Segments, on page 105.
Drawing a Saltbox Roof

Saltbox roofs are similar to gable roofs, with an offset ridge. Although they are not symmetrical, they are extremely attractive and easy to create. Note: At this point there will be a gap between the two roof sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable Roof section. 10 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 11 For the upper section, click the 4:12 pitch option. 12 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. 13 Right-click the upper roof section and click Elevate Roof from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
To draw a saltbox roof 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Type 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth text field and press ENTER to accept the value. 3 (optional) Click to check No Soffit, then click OK. 4 Click the 8:12 pitch option.
Drawing a Saltbox Roof
5 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. 6 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
12 Click the roof section to select it. The Tool Options displays the pitches that are available. 13 Click the Elevation Base radio button to measure from the ground to the peak of the roof section. 14 Type the number noted from Step 7 in the Object Elevation text field and press ENTER to accept the value.
7 Press the mouse button and drag a box around all points of the roof section to select it. Make a note of the elevation that is specified as the upper elevation of the roof section. 8 On the Edit menu, click Copy (or press CTRL+C). 9 On the Edit menu, click Paste or (press CTRL+V). A duplicate roof section is created. 10 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section 180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow. Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style, refer to Defining Gable Wall Segments, on page 105.
11 Click the lower edge of the second roof section and resize the roof.
137
Chapter
20 Roofing Plan Tab
Chapter 21
HVAC Plan Tab

Correctly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate ventilation. Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint hold down SHIFT, while drawing. 3 Release the mouse button to place the air duct segment.
Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, its easy to adjust or move components. You can even move components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.
To move air ducts a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the air duct you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. The air duct is moved to the location you specified. To rotate air ducts 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the air duct you want to rotate. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box. 5 Click OK. The selected air duct is rotated by the angle you specified.
Placing Air Ducts

TurboFloorPlan features several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To place air ducts, simply click and drag. Air ducts are drawn horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are actually placed in a new home. You can move air ducts by dragging, by a specific distance, or rotate them to fit your home design. If you dont find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home plan, you can define the size of the duct yourself, using the HVAC properties dialog box. To place air ducts 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Air Duct Tool. 2 Click on the plan drawing; hold down the mouse button and drag. The duct work is displayed, as you drag, displaying the measurements of the duct.
139
Chapter
21 HVAC Plan Tab

To move a vent or register by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the vent you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK. The vent is moved to the location you specified. To rotate registers or vents 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the register or vent you want to rotate. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box. 5 Click OK. The selected vent is rotated by the angle you specified.
To resize an air duct 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the air duct to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type new width and depth measurements in the appropriate text boxes. Press ENTER to accept new values. The air duct you selected is resized.
Placing Vents and Registers

Placing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once youve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at custom angles to fit your design. TurboFloorPlan provides several vents to choose from, including floor and ceiling vents. To place vents 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click a Vent Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The vent you selected is placed.
Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps

Adding heating and air conditioning units only involves one mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific distances, drag to move them, and even rotate them to fit your home design. To place a furnace 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Furnace Tool. To place registers 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Register Tool. 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The vent you selected is placed.
Drag
2 Click once in your plan drawing. The unit you selected is placed.
Placing Baseboard Heaters
To place an air conditioning unit 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click a heating or cooling unit tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The unit you selected is placed.
To place baseboard heaters 1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Baseboard Heater Tool. 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The heater is displayed, as you drag, with dimensions. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the heater to the nearest wall or other HVAC component.
Drag
3 Release the mouse button to place the heater.
To move a heating or air conditioning unit by a specific distance 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the unit you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 5 Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK. The unit is moved to the location you specified. To rotate heating or air conditioning units 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the unit you want to rotate. Selection handles appear. 3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box. 5 Click OK. The selected unit is rotated by the angle you specified.
Elevating to a Floors Base or Surface

You can set an objects elevation to match that of a floors base or surface. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as placing a floor register perfectly on the surface of a floor with a custom elevation, or an air return on the bottom surface of a floor so it is set to the exact elevation as the floor. You can elevate an object to a floors base, the bottom surface, or top surface. Note: When youre working on the first floor, and working with the first floor exterior walls, you can only elevate selections to the floors surface, otherwise objects would be underground. To elevate to a floors surface 1 Click to select the floor to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated. Important: Both the floor and the object must be selected.
Placing Baseboard Heaters

As you place baseboard heaters in your home plan, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place heaters a specific distance from a neighboring HVAC component or wall segment. Youll notice that, when placing heaters, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.
3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected floors surface. The object is elevated to the top surface of the floor you selected.
141
Chapter
21 HVAC Plan Tab

To work on a selected floor
To elevate to a floors base 1 Click to select the floor to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated. Important: Both the floor and the object must be selected. 3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. Click Elevate to selected floors base. The object is elevated to the bottom surface of the floor you selected. To move a baseboard heater 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the heater you want to move. Selection handles appear. 3 Drag the register to a new location. As you move the heater, automatic dimensioning is displayed. 4 Release the mouse button to place the heater in the new location.
On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work. (alternate) To work on the first floor, press CTRL+1. (alternate) To work on the second floor, press CTRL+2. (alternate) To work on the third floor, press CTRL+3.
Editing Your Design

TurboFloorPlan provides you with editing tools to help you modify your interior floor plan. You must select the object(s) you want to edit before clicking on the Edit menu. To copy an object from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want duplicated. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level. Note: The first floor is set as your default working floor. To move objects from one floor to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want moved. To select more than one, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level. To move objects using the Nudge feature 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object to select it. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right). Tip: You can also nudge your design by using the arrows on your
keyboard.

You can control a variety of drawing settings on the Design menu. When working within multiple floors, it is important to have control of your ceiling heights, working floor, and to be sure youre at the correct working elevation To set the working elevation 1 On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the Working Elevation you want in the text box, and click OK. To set ceiling heights 1 On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights. The Default Ceiling Heights dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the height you want the first floor ceiling to be, in the First Floor text box. 3 Type the height you want the second floor ceiling to be, in the Second Floor text box. 4 Type the height you want to third floor ceiling to be, in the Third Floor text box. 5 Click OK.
To move the an object or entity a specified amount 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want moved. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking.
Editing Your Design
3 On the Edit menu, click Move or double-click the Selection Tool. The Move dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes. 5 Click OK. The object is moved, based on the coordinates you specified. Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To freely rotate an entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the feature you want to rotate. 3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. 4 Click the entity; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the entity to rotate. Degree of rotation will appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. Press SHIFT to release the 45 degree constraint. 5 Release the mouse button. To rotate by specifying an amount 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want rotated. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box. 5 Click OK. The object is rotated based on the angle measurement you specified. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction. To flip an object or entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want flipped. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal. The object is flipped.
To mirror an object or entity 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object(s) you want mirrored. To select more than one object, press SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical or Mirror Horizontal. The object is mirrored.
143
Chapter
21 HVAC Plan Tab
Chapter 22
Deck Plan Tab

If you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but dont want to build an addition, you might consider adding a deck. TurboFloorPlan contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas.
3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck. To reshape a deck 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. You will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim, and steps. 2 Click the side of the deck you want to reshape. 3 Click a cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag.
Adding a Deck
Adding a deck is a great way to add living space to your home. With TurboFloorPlan, you can build deck sections on the fly, with or without railings. All sections can be altered, if you change your mind, in the middle of the design process. To draw a deck 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click a Deck Tool on the collapsible toolset.
Tracing an Exterior Wall Perimeter

The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a deck against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time during the designing process, you can view your work in 3D. To draw a wall trace perimeter deck 1 Click the Deck Wall Trace Tool on the collapsible toolset. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 Click the design window to define the start point of the deck. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
2 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
145
Chapter
22 Deck Plan Tab
3 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the deck to the size you want.
4 Click the wall where you want to change direction. The deck will conform to the wall perimeter.
5 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck. 4 Release the mouse button. The deck will conform to the wall perimeter.
6 Right-click to end drawing mode.
To draw a custom wall trace perimeter polygon deck 1 Click the Custom Deck Wall Trace Tool on the collapsible toolset. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click a wall on the design window to define the start point. Note: Only the edges of the deck that are away from the house perimeter will have railings.
Changing the Deck Height

Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and elegant deck. To change deck height 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck you want to raise or lower, to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the height, in inches, in the Height text field. Press ENTER to accept new values.
3 Drag to define the direction you want the deck to be drawn. A rubber band arrow is displayed and follows the pointer. Release the mouse button.
Editing Skirt Trim Options
Note: A positive number raises the deck, while a negative number lowers it. Fractions of inches are entered in decimal form. To auto-elevate a cutout to a deck 1 Click to select the deck to which you want the cutout elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the cutout you want elevated. Important: Both the deck and the cutout must be selected. 3 Right-click on a segment of the cutout you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected deck. The cutout is elevated and creates a perfect cutout in the deck.
To remove handrails 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold down SHIFT, while clicking sides. 3 Click to uncheck the Include Handrail checkbox. To change handrail height 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the height, in inches, in the Handrails Height text field. Press ENTER to accept new values. To change baluster spacing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the spacing, in inches, in the Handrails Baluster Spacing text field. Press ENTER to accept new value.
Editing Step Options Editing Skirt Trim Options

By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In addition to including skirt trim on only the sides you want, you can customize it by applying colors or materials. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 17. To remove skirt trim 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck where you want to remove skirt trim. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to uncheck Skirting. Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold down SHIFT, while clicking sides. Using TurboFloorPlan, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position. To add steps 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the side of the deck where you want to add steps. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Insert New. The steps are inserted in the middle of the selected side. To resize steps by a specific measurement 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the steps you want to resize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new width, in inches. Press ENTER to accept new values.
Editing Handrail Options

With TurboFloorPlan, you can easily customize deck options. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster spacing is set to 6".
147
Chapter
22 Deck Plan Tab

3 Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click to place the staircase. 4 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.
To change the step height 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new height, in inches. Press ENTER to accept new values. Note: This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level. To edit handrail placement 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to uncheck the checkbox next to Handrails on Left (or Right). The handrails on the selected side will be removed.
Modifying a Custom Staircase

Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With TurboFloorPlan, you have total control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, as well as handrail height and placement. Customizing staircase features 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the staircase you want to customize to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 (optional) Type a new staircase height and width. Press ENTER to accept new values. 4 (optional) Check the checkbox to add skirt walls. 5 (optional) Type a new step height (riser). Press ENTER to accept new values. 6 (optional) Type a step depth (tread). Press ENTER to accept new values. 7 (optional) Specify handrail height and location, left or right, as you are looking from bottom of staircase. Press ENTER to accept new values. 8 (optional) Specify Closed Stringer and/or Large Base, if needed.
Placing a Custom Staircase

In addition to the Add Steps feature, TurboFloorPlan gives you the option of easily drawing custom staircases. To draw a straight staircase 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode. 4 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to release the 15 degree constraint. To draw a curved staircase 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Staircase Tool Options is displayed. 2 Click and release on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.
Resizing a staircase 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to resize. 3 Click an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase; hold down the mouse button and drag. Reversing the direction of a staircase 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the centerline of the staircase you want to alter. 3 Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is reversed.
Adding Custom Railings
Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.
Customizing railing features 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the railing you want to customize. The Handrail Tool Options are displayed. 3 (optional) Type a new handrail height. Press ENTER to accept new values. 4 (optional) Type a new baluster spacing. Press ENTER to accept new values. 5 (optional) Check whether railing posts are wanted. Resizing a railing
Adding Custom Railings

Customizing railings is easy with TurboFloorPlan; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck. To draw a straight railing 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Railing Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber band railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. 3 Extend the railing to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode. 4 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to release the 15 degree constraint. To draw a curved railing 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Railing Tool on the collapsible toolset. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber band railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer. Note: The railing will appear angular, as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set. 3 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain railing to a perfect arc.
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the railing you want to resize. 3 Click on an endpoint of the railing; hold down the mouse button and drag. The railing is resized.
Creating a Deck Cutout

You can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool or hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool. To create a deck cutout 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Deck Cutout Tool. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the cutout. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck cutout. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the cutout.
Modifying a Custom Railing

Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using TurboFloorPlan, you gain total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing, and railing posts.
Elevating Objects to a Decks Base or Surface

You can set an objects elevation to match that of a decks base or surface. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as tables and chairs to the surface of a deck, a grill onto a deck, and other objects perfectly on a decks top or bottom surface. To elevate to a decks surface 1 Click to select the deck to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated.
149
Chapter
22 Deck Plan Tab
Important: Both the deck and the object must be selected. 3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected decks surface. The object is elevated to the top surface of the deck you selected. To elevate to a decks base 1 Click to select the deck to which you want an object elevated. 2 Press SHIFT and click to select the object you want elevated. Important: Both the deck and the object must be selected. 3 Right-click on the center of the object you want elevated. The pop-up menu is displayed. 4 Click Elevate to selected decks base. The object is elevated to the bottom surface of the deck you selected.
Chapter 23
Landscape Plan Tab

From adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, TurboFloorPlan contains an extensive toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas.
3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the property line. You will learn to add a pond, pathways, and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create flower beds that you can landscape, using flowers, shrubs, and trees, accessible from the Plant Tab. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode. Note: To draw curved property lines, use the Curve Tool on the Detail Tab, then see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 165. To edit the property line 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the property line to select it. 3 Click a cornerpoint of the property line; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next selection point, hold down the mouse button and drag.
Defining the Property Line

If you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, you may want to define the property lines. The property line will only appear in the 2D design window. To define the property line 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Property Line Tool. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the property line. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the property line. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
Adding a Ground Fill Region

From simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds to elaborate planting areas, TurboFloorPlan makes designing them easy. You can design flower beds to flawlessly integrate with your home design. To draw ground fill region 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Ground Fill Tool.
151
Chapter
23 Landscape Plan Tab

4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag. To add a ground fill description 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a segment of the fill region you want to edit and choose Ground Fill Description. The Ground Fill Description dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a description of the ground fill section and click OK.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the ground fill region. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the ground fill region. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
Drawing a Patio
Easily customize your outdoor living space by adding a patio. 3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the ground fill region. To define the patio shape 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Patio Tool. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the patio. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
4 Right-click to end drawing mode. 5 (optional) Drag and drop materials onto the region in the 3D View window.
3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the shape of your patio. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode. To edit the patio shape 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the patio to select it. To reshape a ground fill region 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a side of the ground fill region you want to reshape. 3 Click a selection point of the ground fill region; hold down the mouse button and drag. 152 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide 3 Click a cornerpoint of the patio; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.
Adding Outdoor Cabinets
To add a patio description 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a segment of the fill region you want to edit and choose Patio Description. The Patio Description dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a description of the patio section and click OK.
2 Select the cabinet you want to customize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet button and choose the surface or component you want to edit. Its properties are displayed. 4 Type the values you want in the corresponding text fields. Be sure to press ENTER to accept each new value.
Adding Outdoor Cabinets

Outdoor Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch. To add outdoor cabinets 1 Click the Outdoor Cabinet Tool. The Tool Options are displayed with different cabinet options. 2 Click the Cabinet Style button and choose the style of cabinet you want. 3 Position your cursor in the design window where you want the cabinet and click to place. The cabinet is placed in the drawing.
Adding Cabinet Hardware

Cabinet hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. TurboFloorPlan has an extensive library of hardware. To add hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the design window, click the cabinet where you want to add hardware. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet type button, then click the surface or component on which you want to add hardware. For example, Base Door. 4 In the Hardware section, on Tool options, Click the Hardware Library button and choose the type of hardware you want to add. 5 Click the Hardware Style button, then click to select the hardware you want to use. The hardware is added to the door and displayed in 3D view. To remove hardware 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the cabinet where you want to remove hardware. The Tools Options are displayed. 3 Click the Cabinet type button, then click the surface or component from which you want to remove hardware. 4 Click the Hardware Style button, then scroll to the bottom and click No Hardware. The hardware is removed.
To create a custom cabinet 1 Click the Outdoor Cabinet Tool. The Tool Options are displayed with different cabinet options. 2 Click the Cabinet Style button and choose the style of cabinet you want. 3 Click the Cabinet button and choose the surface or component you want to edit. Its properties are displayed. 4 Type the dimensions you want in the corresponding text fields. Be sure to press ENTER to accept each new value. 5 Position your cursor in the design window where you want the cabinet and click to place. The cabinet is placed in the drawing. To customize cabinet dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
153
Chapter

To change the width of a pathway 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the centerline of the pathway, to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type a new width, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. Press ENTER to accept new values. To add a pathway/driveway description 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the pathway/driveway you want to edit and choose Pathway/Driveway Description. The Pathway/ Driveway Description dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a description of the pathway/driveway section and click OK.
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways

In TurboFloorPlan, you can design sidewalks, pathways, and driveways, using the same tool. Once a pathway is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material to suit your needs. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 25. To add a pathway 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Pathway Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type a new width, in the text box, in the Width field. Press ENTER to accept new values. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the pathway. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 4 Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until you have completely drawn the pathway. 5 Right-click to end drawing mode. The pathway is displayed. Note: While drawing, curved pathways will appear angular, but will curve after the second mouse click. To straighten a curved pathway 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the pathway you want to straighten. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Straight radio button. The pathway is straightened. To curve a straight pathway 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the pathway you want to curve. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Curved radio button. The pathway becomes curved. To reshape a pathway 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the centerline of the pathway you want to reshape. 3 Click a selection point of the pathway; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.
Adding Fill
You can use the Fill Tool to show mulch around trees or shrubs, or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping. To mulch around a tree 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool from the Fill toolset. 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. A rubber band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 3 Release the mouse button. The fill is placed.
4 (optional) Move the fill area into position, if necessary. Note: By default, mulch material will be applied to the shape you drew. To apply different mulch or other material, see To apply material, on page 32.
Edging an Area
To add a pond 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool. 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag the pond to the shape you want. 3 Release the mouse button. 4 Open a 3D view. 5 Click the Materials Tab, then click to select the Library, then click Mulch. 6 Scroll to view the available materials, until you locate the water textures. 7 Drag and drop the water texture onto the fill area in the 3D view window. The material is applied. To add a fill description 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the fill you want to edit and choose Fill Description. The Fill Description dialog box is displayed. 3 Type a description of the fill section and click OK.
and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
5 Move the pointer to the next point. Right-click to end drawing mode.
Note: You can add curvature to straight edging segments to create curved edging. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 164. To change edging style 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the edging you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click a different edging style in the Preview Bar. The edging is updated. To reshape edging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the edging you want to reshape. 3 Click a selection point of the edging; hold down the mouse button and drag. 4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag. To flip edging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the edging you want to flip. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Flip Face to flip the direction of the edging. To vary edging heights 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Edging an Area
TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to place edging around flower beds or along walkways. Once drawn, you can apply colors or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plans color scheme. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 25. To draw edging 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Edging Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type new values for the Width, Depth, Height, or Spacing, if desired. Press ENTER to accept new values. 3 (optional) Select the edging style you want in the Preview Bar. Edging is drawn using a default style, but you can choose a different one, if desired. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the edging. A rubber band line is displayed
155
Chapter
2 Click to select the edging you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Vary Heights. The edging is displayed with ragged, varied heights along the entire segment. To even out edging heights 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the edging you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to deselect Vary Heights. The edging is displaying with the same height along the entire segment. Start Point
Drawing Fences and Gates

With TurboFloorPlan, you can draw fences and gates with ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 25. The following example will show you how to draw a typical fence of chain link. The material is a custom fencing material. To add and customize a fence 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Fence Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Choose a fence style or choose the Custom style, to edit the fence properties. 3 (optional) For Custom fences, type the Span, Post, and gate sizes you want. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the fence. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
5 Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until you have completely drawn the fence.
6 Right-click to end drawing mode and place the fence.
7 Click the Materials Tab. The Materials libraries are displayed. 8 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Materials library drop-down menu, then select Custom Material Library.
9 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Custom Materials drop-down menu, then click Custom Fences.
Drawing Retaining Walls
10 Click the Custom Fences drop-down menu, then select the type of fence you want to use; Chain-Linked in this case. Custom fence material options appear in the Preview Bar.
4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag. To change the fence style 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the fence you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to select the style you want. The fence is updated.
11 Drag and drop the material onto your fence in the 3D view window. The material is applied.
To add a gate 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Gate Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Type the gate width in the text field. Press ENTER to accept new values. 3 On the design window, drag along the fence to position the gate where you want it and release to place the gate. Note: The style of the gate always conforms to the fencing material; i.e., if a gate is placed on a privacy fence, the gate will be a privacy fence gate.
Drawing Retaining Walls

TurboFloorPlan makes it easy to add interest and functionality to your outdoor living areas by adding retaining walls. Retaining walls can be used to create raised planting beds, to line an above-ground swimming pool, and so on. 12 Click the Paint Colors Tab. The Paint Colors are displayed. 13 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Paint Colors drop-down menu and choose Custom Colors. 14 From the Custom Colors drop-down menu, click Gray Tones. The Gray Tones library is displayed in the Preview Bar. 15 Select a gray to simulate the steel posts and drag and drop that color onto the posts in your 3D view window. The color is applied. To reshape a fence 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the fence you want to reshape. 3 Click a selection point of the fence; hold down the mouse button and drag. To draw a retaining wall 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Retaining Wall Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type the sizes you want for the retaining wall. Press ENTER to accept new values. 3 Click the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the retaining wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the length. 4 Release the mouse button when you reach the wall length you want. 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3, drawing individual walls, until the retaining wall is complete.
157
Chapter

3 Release to set the radius. 4 Drag to set the degree of coverage for the sprinkler and click to place.
Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down SHIFT, while drawing. Note: If you dont see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it may be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, click to check Automatic Dimensioning, on the 2D Menu. To change wall height 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a wall segment in your drawing, to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type a new height in the Wall Height field and then press ENTER to accept the new value. The wall height is updated. Note: Measurements are measured in inches, or in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. Note: By placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern. To draw an irrigation water line 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Irrigation Water Line Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of the water line. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 3 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the line to the length you want. 5 Continue placing sprinkler heads to cover the desired area.
Designing a Sprinkler System

TurboFloorPlan will be useful to design a sprinkler system for your yard. To place a sprinkler head 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Sprinkler Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 On the design window, click to define the center of the sprinkler area and drag. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw, measuring the radius of the sprinkler area.
To define an irrigation zone 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Irrigation Zone Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click once in your plan drawing to place each zone.
Drawing Topography Objects
To place an irrigation control panel 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Irrigation Control Panel Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 On the Design window, click on the wall where you want the control panel to be located. To place an irrigation backflow valve 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Irrigation Backflow Valve Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click once in your plan drawing to place each valve. To place a rain sensor 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Rain Sensor Tool on the collapsible toolset. 2 Click once in your plan drawing to place each sensor.
Adding Slopes
Many topographical maps show slope, rather than complex topography shapes. Once youve defined the slope, you can move selected topography lines to create plateaus or otherwise customize your topography design. To define slope sections 1 Click the Slope Lot Section Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type a different Start Elevation in the text field and press ENTER. 3 (optional) Type a different Descent Angle in the text field and press ENTER. 4 Click the design window where you want the top of the slope; hold down the mouse button and drag. 5 Release the mouse button to place the bottom of the slope. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the topography is drawn to your lots specifications.
Drawing Topography Objects

Contour lines represent a series of connected points that share the same elevation, you can draw open or closed contours to represent the topography of your lot. The various contour tools all work in much the same way. You begin by choosing a general shape for your contour, setting the elevation, then choosing the drawing method. Note: Elevations for topography objects are not cumulative, each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing. To draw topographical features 1 Click the Topography Line Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 Click the 2D Draw Method button. The 2D shapes are displayed. 3 Choose the topography shape you want. 4 (optional) Click the Style Draw Method button and choose the draw style. 5 (optional) Type the elevation you want in the text field and press ENTER. 6 Draw the topography object, according to the shape you chose. 7 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. Note: For more information, see Drawing Shapes, which begins on page 161.
Excavating Topography
From earth-contact homes to split front-to-back lots, you can excavate the footprint of your floor plan with ease. To excavate an area 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Excavate Topography Tool. 2 Click the design window to define the start point of the area to be excavated. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw. Note: Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down SHIFT, while drawing. 3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the area. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode.
159
Chapter
5 (optional) While the excavation area is selected, type a new elevation in the Object Elevation field and press ENTER. Note: Default elevation is -3' (negative three feet).
Chapter 24
Detail Plan Tab

TurboFloorPlan provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D View window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks that are used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor.
2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The four predefined drawing methods are: draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw square from corner, and draw square from center. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.
In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan Tab, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/DWG shapes to various smart entities like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines, and so on.
Drawing Shapes
The Detail Plan Tab features several tools for drawing basic shapes like rectangles, arcs, and curves. Methods for drawing these shapes are used throughout TurboFloorPlan.
5 Release the mouse button to place.
Drawing Circles and Ovals

You can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to curved walls, curved stairways, groundfill regions, and so on. To draw circles and ovals 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed.
Drawing Rectangles and Squares

With TurboFloorPlan, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes can be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls, stairways, pathways, edging, and so on. Rectangles can also be used as label boxes for your printed plans or can be converted to walls or flooring. To draw rectangles and squares 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed.
161
Chapter
24 Detail Plan Tab
2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The four predefined drawing methods are: draw oval from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner, and draw circle from center. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the shape to the size you want.
Drawing Polygons
You can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily converted into walls, roof sections, floors or floor cutouts, topography, and so on. To draw a polygon 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The two predefined drawing methods are: closed polygon and open polygon. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 4 Click and drag the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape.
Drawing Lines
You can draw lines that can in turn be converted to walls, stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways, and so on. To draw lines 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The two predefined drawing methods are: draw from endpoint and draw from center point. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the line to the length you want. 5 Right-click to end drawing mode and place the shape.
Drawing Arcs
With TurboFloorPlan you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and so on. To draw an arc 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The two predefined drawing methods are: free-form arc and 90-degree arc. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the arc. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
Drawing Circular Arcs
4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the arc to the size you want.
feature. For more information, see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 165. To draw a multigon 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Type the number of equal sides you want to draw. Press ENTER to accept new values.
Drawing Circular Arcs

With TurboFloorPlan, you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and so on. To draw a circular arc 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click the design window to define the center point of the circular arc and drag to extend the radius to the size you want. A rubber band line follows the pointer.
3 Position your cursor where you want the center point of the multigon then, with your mouse button down, to the size you want. A rubber band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.
4 Release the mouse button to place the shape. Note: To change the multigons size, but constrain its orientation, hold down CTRL while drawing.
Drawing Curves
You can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert To feature of TurboFloorPlan. 3 Release the mouse button and drag, clockwise or counter-clockwise, to create the shape you want. To draw a curve 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode and the Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Click the Method button and choose the draw method. Note: The two predefined drawing methods are: closed curve and open curve. 3 Click the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber band curve is displayed and follows the pointer. 4 Click and drag the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 5 Double-click to end drawing mode and place the shape.
4 Click to end drawing mode and place the shape.
Drawing Multigons
You can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with the easy-to-use Multigon Tool and the Convert To
163
Chapter
24 Detail Plan Tab

2 Click an object to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Straighten button, in the Curve section. The curve is changed to a polyline.
Changing Curve Tension

To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy to create angular shapes and, with Curve Tension, you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightlyexaggerated curve. To change curve tension 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click an object to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Adjust button, in the Curve section. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.
Using Rules and Fills

You can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the shapes drawn with tools on the Details Plan tab. To change the line weight 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule Weight button. The Rule Weight drop-down is displayed. 4 Click the line weight you want. The line weight is updated. 5 (optional) Click Other to define a custom weight. To change the line style
4 Type the amount of tension that you want. 5 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied. Examples: Default Curve Tension (8):
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule Style button. The Rule Style drop-down is displayed. 4 Click the line style you want. The line style is updated.
To set the fill to transparent 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. Curve Tension set at 2: 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Transparent Fill icon. The shape becomes transparent. To set the fill to white 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the White Fill icon. The shape is filled with white. To set the fill to solid To remove curve tension 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 164 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Converting Details to Intelligent Features
2 Click a shape to select it. 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Solid Fill icon. The shape is filled with a solid color. To set the fill to a pattern 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click one of the Pattern Fill icons. The shape is filled with that pattern. To control layering of detail shapes 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Bring to Front button to place the selected shape on the top of the other shapes. 4 (optional) Click the Send to Back button to place the selected shape behind the other shapes.
Editing Detail Shapes

Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To fine-tune your design further, use the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are available anytime, but are especially useful when editing shapes. To use object selection mode 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a Detail shape to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to select Object in the Edit Level section. 4 Click the object and drag it into the new position or shape. 5 Release the mouse to place. To use point selection mode 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a Detail shape to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click to select Points in the Edit Level section. 4 Click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it. 5 Release the mouse to place.
Converting Details to Intelligent Features

With TurboFloorPlan, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window, or you can convert them to intelligent features. For example, you can convert a line to a fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck or even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no limit to what you can draw, using this combination. Following are a few examples of what this powerful process can do! To convert a shape to an intelligent object 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click a shape to select it. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click the Convert To button and then click one of the objects to convert the selection. The shape is converted to the object you specified.
165
Chapter
24 Detail Plan Tab

4 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Chamfer Corner Tool. 5 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the object.
To fillet (round) a corner 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to fillet. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Points, in the Edit Level section. 4 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool. 5 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the object.
6 Release the mouse to end. To add additional points 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Add Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 6 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner. To inversely fillet a corner 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to fillet. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Points, in the Edit Level section. 4 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool. 5 While pressing SHIFT, click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the object. 2 Click to add a new point to a shape you have created. To remove a point 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Remove Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click to remove a point from a shape you have created.
6 Release the mouse to end. To chamfer a corner 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to chamfer. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Click Points, in the Edit Level section. 166 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
Chapter 25
Framing Plan Tab

The tools contained on TurboFloorPlans Framing Plan tab allow you to view and edit the framing of your design. You can add beams, joists, and other supports, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used for what purpose.
To specify framing material 1 Right-click a wall and choose Framing Properties on the menu. The Wall Framing dialog box is displayed. 2 Choose the material you want to use. 3 Click OK.
Adding Structural Components

The Framing tools let you define exactly where and what kind of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing phase of your design. To add a framing beam 1 On the Framing Plan tab, click the Framing Beam Tool. The Tool Options are displayed.
Customizing Wall Framing Properties

As you draw walls in TurboFloorPlan you specify which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, and so on. To specify insulation 1 Right-click a wall and choose Framing Properties on the menu. The Wall Framing dialog box is displayed.
2 (optional) Specify the properties under Tool Options. 3 Click the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the beam follows the pointer and automatically displays the length. 4 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode. Note: Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down SHIFT, while drawing. To add flooring joists 1 On the Framing Plan tab, click the Joists Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Specify the properties under Tool Options.
2 Select Insulated and click OK. To specify load bearing 1 Right-click a wall and choose Framing Properties on the menu. The Wall Framing dialog box is displayed. 2 Select Load bearing and click OK.
3 Click the design window, to define the start point of the flooring joists, and drag. A rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring joists. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
167
Chapter
25 Framing Plan Tab

3 Type the width and height you want in the corresponding fields. Press ENTER to accept the new values.
Customizing Joist Properties

TurboFloorPlan automatically frames each floor, wall, and roof section with specifications that you can easily modify. To specify joist material 4 Click and Drag the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring joists area. 5 Right-click to end drawing mode. To place support columns 1 On the Framing Plan tab, click the Support Column Tool. The Tool Options are displayed. 2 (optional) Specify the properties under Tool Options. 3 Click the design window. A support column will be placed at the location of each click. 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the perimeter of a framing section. The Tool Options are displayed.
Customizing Framing Beam Properties

After adding a framing beam you can change its type and size. To specify beam type 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the beam you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed.
3 Choose the material you want. The joist is updated. To change joists angle 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the perimeter of a framing section. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the degree at which you want the joists placed in the Joist Angle field and press ENTER. The joist is updated. To change joists spacing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the perimeter of a framing section. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new spacing in the Joist Spacing field, and press ENTER. The joist is updated. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
3 Choose the type of beam you want. The beam is updated. To change framing beam size 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the beam you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed.
To change joists size 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the perimeter of a framing section. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the new size in the Joist Size field, and press ENTER. The joist is updated.
Specifying Support Column Properties
For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. To specify rim joists 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the perimeter of a framing section. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Select the Rim-Joist (Header) checkbox. 3 Choose the material you want in the Framing Material section and click OK. To change rafter spacing 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a roof section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog is displayed. 3 Type the rafter spacing you want in the corresponding field and click OK. To change rafter size 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a roof section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog is displayed. 3 Type the rafter height you want in the corresponding field and click OK. 3 Choose the material you want. The column is updated. To change column size 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the support column you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the height and diameter you want in the corresponding fields. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values. To specify roofing trusses 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a roof section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog is displayed. 3 Click the Frame Trusses radio button. 4 Type the truss spacing you want and click OK.
Specifying Support Column Properties

After adding a support column, you can change its material and size. To specify column material 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Select the support column you want to edit. The Tool Options are displayed.
Customizing Deck Framing Properties Customizing Rafter Properties

Roof sections are automatically framed with specifications set in TurboFloorPlan. You can easily modify all of these settings. To specify rafter material 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a roof section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Roof Framing dialog box is displayed. Decks are automatically framed with specifications set in TurboFloorPlan. You can easily modify all of these settings. To specify deck material 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a deck section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog box is displayed.
169
Chapter
25 Framing Plan Tab
3 Choose the material you want in the Framing Material section and click OK. To edit deck framing properties 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a deck section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog is displayed. 3 Type the decking boards width and angle, in the corresponding fields. 4 Type the deck joist height, spacing, and angle, in the corresponding fields. 5 Click OK. To edit deck pier/post properties 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the perimeter of a deck section and choose Framing Properties from the menu. The Framing Properties dialog is displayed. 3 Type the post piers diameter and depth you want in the corresponding fields. 4 Click OK.
Chapter 26
Fence Designer
Whether its selecting the picket type for an ornamental iron fence, setting the railing heights on a gate, or adding color or texture to fence sections, the Fence Designer lets you customize images of fences and gates so you can tour a realistic rendering of your garden plan in TurboFloorPlan.
Launching Fence Designer 1 From the Design menu, click Launch PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher is displayed. 2 Click to select Fence Designer and click the Launch button. The Fence Designer is launched. To select a fence style and size 1 To display the Fence Design dialog box, launch the PowerTool, or click New from the File menu. The Fence Design dialog box is displayed.
2 Select either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design. 3 From the Component Style drop-down menu, click the style fence you want. 4 Type the width and height you want in the corresponding text boxes. 5 Click OK. The fence is displayed, based on your specifications.
Designing Fences
Fence Designer gives you two powerful toolsets to use in your fence designs. Controlled Detailing tools allow you to control attributes such as rail placement and picket caps. Freehand Detailing tools allow you to modify the appearance of those elements or even draw new elements. The first step to creating your fence is choose the style fence you want. The Fence Design dialog box allows you to select basic style options to get your fence started, then you can customize each components property to make it your own.
To create a new fence style From the File menu, click New. The Fence Design dialog box is displayed.
Customizing Fence Properties

Controlled detailing allows you to choose specific fence components and edit their properties using dimensions and values. Each fence style has different properties, each of which can be customized.
171
Chapter
26 Fence Designer
4 From the Components drop-down menu, click Railing. The properties are displayed.
To customize the chain-linked fence properties 1 From the Components drop-down menu, click Chain Link Fabric. The properties are displayed.
2 From the Mesh drop-down menu, click the dimensions you want. 3 From the Wire drop-down menu, click the thickness you want. The fence design is automatically updated as you adjust the properties. 4 From the Components drop-down menu, click Frame Work. The properties are displayed.
5 Select the rails to be included, or deselect to exclude. 6 (optional) To define the height and elevation for a rail, click to select the rail # and type the dimensions you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value. 7 From the Components drop-down menu, click Embellishments. The properties are displayed.
5 Type the height and elevation you want for the upper rail. Press ENTER to accept each value. 6 (optional) Select Lower Beam to include a lower beam, and specify the height. To customize ornamental iron fence properties 1 From the Components drop-down menu, click Iron Pickets. The properties are displayed.
8 Select the accessory to be included, or deselect to exclude. 9 (optional) To define the properties for each accessory, click to select it and specify the style, thickness, height, and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value. To customize picket fence properties 1 From the Components drop-down menu, click Pickets. The properties are displayed.
2 Under Dimensions, type the width, height, and spacing you want for the pickets. Note: The number of pickets that are displayed will vary depending on the width. Note: The height is based on the original width specified on the Fence Design dialog box. 3 Under Iron Picket Cap, specify the style, height, and width of the pick cap. 172 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide 2 Under Dimensions, type the width height, and spacing for the pickets. Press ENTER to accept each new value. 3 Under Picket Cap, specify the style and height.
Freehand Detail Drawing
Note: The Picket Cap height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the caps will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes active. 4 From the Components drop-down menu, click Top Edge. The properties are displayed.
Note: The Board Cap Height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the boards will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes active. 5 From the Components drop-down menu, click Back Railing. The properties are displayed.
5 Specify the style and minimum height you want. Note: The Min Height is not available for the Leveled style, as the top will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Min Height text box becomes active. 6 From the Components drop-down menu, click Back Railing. The properties are displayed. 6 Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude. 7 (optional) To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value. To customize rail fence properties 1 From the Rail drop-down menu, click which rail you want to work on. 2 Under Dimensions, type the height and elevation you want for the selected rail. 3 By default, a tertiary rail is included, positioned between the first and second rail. Selected, or deselect the checkbox to include or exclude it.
7 Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude. 8 (optional) To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value. To customize privacy fence properties 1 From the Components drop-down menu, click Boards. The properties are displayed.

In Freehand Detailing mode, you can move, rotate, or apply colors and textures to individual components of the fence or gate. You can even add custom shapes to the design. All shapes drawn in Fence Designer can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately as you edit. To display dimensions as you draw
2 Under Dimensions, type the width and height you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value. 3 By default, the boards are placed with a small gap between them. Deselect this option to remove the gap. 4 Under Board Cap, specify the style and height.
From the Options menu, click to select Show Tracking Dimensions. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.
173
Chapter
26 Fence Designer
3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the line to the size you want. 5 Release the mouse button. To draw an arc 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Select a color from the Preview Bar. Note: You cannot apply materials to lines and arcs. 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the arc to the size you want.
To draw rectangles and squares 1 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.
5 Release the mouse button. To draw circles and ovals 1 Click the Circle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the shape to the size you want. 5 Release the mouse button. To draw a circular arc 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Select a color from the Preview Bar. Note: You cannot apply materials to lines and arcs. 3 Click on the design window to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc. 5 Release the mouse button. To draw lines 1 Click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Select a color from the Preview Bar. Note: You cannot apply materials to lines and arcs.
4 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button. 6 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.
3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the multigon to the size you want.
5 Release the mouse button. 7 Click to end drawing mode. To draw a polygon 1 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape. To draw a curve 1 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. Note: Although the lines will initially appear angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 5 Double-click to end drawing mode. To move a fence component or shape 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click the fence component or shape you want to move, then click Move on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Move dialog box is displayed.
5 Right-click to end drawing mode. To draw a multigon 1 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 3 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 4 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 5 The shape is moved to the location you specified.
175
Chapter
26 Fence Designer
3 Click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it.
To rotate by specifying an amount 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool then select a fence component or shape in the design window. 2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.
Release the mouse to end. 3 Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to rotate the object and click OK. The shape is rotated. To control layering 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a fence component or shape to select it. 3 Click Bring to Front on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected fence component or shape on the top of the other shapes. 4 (optional) Click Send to Back button on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected fence component or shape behind the other shapes. To use object selection mode 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a fence component or shape to select it, then click Object-Level Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 3 Click the object and drag it into the new position or shape. 2 Click either Resize Using Dimensions or Resize Using Percentages, then enter new values for the width and height in the corresponding text boxes. 3 (optional) Check Rescale Freehand Geometry if you want to scale any shapes you have already drawn in the design. 4 Click OK. To resize a fence section or gate 1 On the Edit menu, click Adjust Design Dimensions. The Design Dimensions dialog box is displayed.
Customizing Fence Materials and Color

The four editing modes available in Fence Designer are:
Custom Color. Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color, in your selected area, with a custom color of your choice. Material Library. Tools in this mode completely replace the original material, in your selected area, with a standard material of your choice. Custom Material Library. If you have already saved custom materials, tools in this mode completely replace the original material, in your selected area, with a custom material of your choice.
4 Release the mouse to end. To use point selection mode 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Right-click a fence component or shape to select it, then click Point-Level Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
File Management
To apply color or texture to a fence component or shape 1 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. 2 Select a fence component (such as a rail or a picket or a shape). The color or texture is applied to that shape.
Using Fence Designer Images in Your Project

Once youve created your own custom fence or gate materials in Fence Designer you can easily apply them back in your TurboFloorPlan project. After youve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply navigate to the library where you stored the new image, and drag the image to the fence in your 3D view. To apply Fence Designer images 1 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar displays materials available for placement. 2 Click the arrow on the Material tab and click Custom Material Library on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
File Management
You can return to a Fence Designer project simply by opening an existing fence design file. Fence designs are saved with the file extension *.FDD. When youre ready to use your fence design in a home design project, simply export it to one of the custom material libraries. To open an existing fence definition 1 On the File menu, click Open. The Open Design dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 4 Click Open. To save a fence image to a material library 1 On the File menu, click Export to Material Library. The Fence Designer dialog box is displayed.
3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to Materials, then click Custom Fences, then select the type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material options appear in the Preview Bar.
4 Click the custom fence material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the fence or gate in the LiveView window. The custom material you selected is applied.

With Fence Designer, you can set specific grid properties that aid in drawing your fence or gate. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid style and whether the grid is hidden from view or displayed. Other drawing settings control whether or not Fence Designer displays warning messages when switching drawing modes or displays automatic dimensions. as you draw.
2 Choose the material category where you want the fence stored. 3 Type a name for the new fence or gate in the Material File Name text box. 4 Type a description of the new fence or gate in the Material Description text box. 5 Click OK.
177
Chapter
26 Fence Designer
2 On the Grid Style tab, click either Grid Dots or Grid Lines, then click OK. The new grid style is applied.
To define Snap to Grid settings 1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 On the Grid Spacing tab, type new measurements into the Snap Grid section, then click OK. Items you draw or drag-and-drop into the design window will now snap to the measurements you defined. Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.10 inch (English), 0.002 m (Metric), and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric). To select grid spacing 1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/ Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric). To move objects/features along the grid 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object or feature you want to move. 3 Using the arrow keys on your keyboard, move the object or feature into position. Note: Each time you press an arrow key, the object or feature will move one increment that you have set in To define Snap to Grid settings, on page 178. To turn off Snap to Grid
On the Options menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid or press CTRL+R. The feature is disabled. To enable Snap to Grid, simply recheck the menu item.
To display the grid
2 Type new horizontal and vertical measurements in the Grid Dots/Lines section of the Grid Spacing page, then click OK. The new grid spacing measurements are applied. To change the grid style 1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
On the Options menu, click to check Grid Visible. The grid is displayed on the design window.
To control automatic dimensions
On the Options menu, click to check Show Tracking Dimensions. When this item is checked Fence Designer automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place shapes in your drawing.
Part 5
Enhancement & Customization PowerTools

TurboFloorPlan includes a vast variety of PowerTools. PowerTools are programs that work in concert with your Program to provide additional functionality.
Chapter 28: Chapter 29: Chapter 35: Chapter 36: Chapter 37:
PhotoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181 185 249 255 273
Chapter 28
PhotoView
TurboFloorPlan lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and landscape around it. From window and door treatments to entire facades, you can simulate your home with ease.
Importing PhotoView Images

Whether you want to import an image of your homes facade to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or window, PhotoView makes it easy. You can import any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor. To import PhotoView images 1 On the Design menu, click Launch PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher is displayed. 2 Click to select PhotoView and click Launch. The Open dialog box is displayed.
From cars to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You can even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, youre home.
Tips for Using PhotoView

TurboFloorPlans PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.
3 In the Look In box, type the name of the directory where your file is located, or search for the file by switching folders or drives. Note: As you scroll through the available images, when one is highlighted, it will be displayed in the preview box. 4 When you find the file you want, click to select it. 5 Click Open. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
Verify that the image is level and square, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is. Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image. Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images. Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result. Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to avoid stacking them on top of each other. Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.
6 Type width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK. Note: PhotoView Images appear as lines in the 2D window.
181
Chapter
28 PhotoView
To replace PhotoView images 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image.
Moving PhotoView Images

When you import a PhotoView image into your file, it will be placed in the center of the lot. You have freedom to move the image anywhere on the plan window and between plan tabs. To move PhotoView images by dragging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click a PhotoView image to select it. Note: In 2D plan, a PhotoView image is displayed as a line. 3 Holding down the mouse button, drag the image to a new location, then release the mouse button. Note: Be sure to drag the image from the center; dragging an endpoint resizes the image. To move PhotoView images from one plan tab to another 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click the image you want moved. To select more than one image, press SHIFT, while clicking objects. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan. Then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up menu that is displayed. 4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.
3 Click Set Image on the Tool Options sheet. The Open PhotoView Image File dialog box is displayed. 4 In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 5 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 6 Click OK. The PhotoView Properties dialog box is displayed. 7 (optional) Type the width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen in the text boxes on the Properties toolbar. The image is resized. To locate PhotoView images 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image. Then click Image Info on the Properties toolbar. The PhotoView Info dialog box is displayed and shows the path where the file is located on your hard drive.
3 (optional) Click Set Image to load another file. Tip: You will find it useful to store PhotoView images in the Content folder in the TurboFloorPlan directory. The content folder is designed to be the first place searched for missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom materials, custom trims, and so on.
Replacing PhotoView Images

You can try out different window or door images, for example, by using the Set PhotoView Image option on the right-click pop-up menu.
Elevating PhotoView Images
Elevating PhotoView Images

You can elevate PhotoView images, based on a measurement you define. To elevate PhotoView images by specifying a measurement 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click an image to select it. To select more than one image, hold down SHIFT while clicking. 3 On the Edit menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.
To resize PhotoView images by specifying dimensions 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to resize. The Tool Options are displayed. 3 Type the width and height, in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, in the text boxes on the Tool Options Tool Options. The image is resized. To resize PhotoView images by dragging 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click a PhotoView image, to select it. 3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the image, drag the endpoint, until the image is the size you want, then release the mouse button. Note: Dragging an endpoint only changes the width of the image; to keep proportions accurate, update the height in the PhotoView Properties text box, as shown above.
4 Type the measurement, in inches, that you want to elevate the image, then click OK. Note: Use this feature to lower objects by typing a negative number in the Set Elevation dialog box. To elevate PhotoView images by using the Elevation Slider 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click an image to select it. To select more than one object, hold down SHIFT, while clicking. 3 On the left side of the window, drag the Elevation Slider up or down. 4 Release the mouse. The image will be repositioned.
To flip PhotoView images 1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to flip, then click <<Flip>> on the Tool Option Tool Options. The image is flipped.
Landscaping Using PhotoView Images

One way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish your design with landscaping and other objects. To landscape using PhotoView images 1 Import the image of your home, as explained previously.
Altering PhotoView Images

Once you have imported your PhotoView image, you have the option of further customizing its appearance. This can be done at any time during the design process. You can resize, change elevation, rotate, or flip it, and so on.
183
Chapter
28 PhotoView
Note: Its very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see To import PhotoView images, which begins on page 181. 2 On the Window menu, click Split View or click the Split View button. 3 Using tools and techniques described in previous chapters, add pathways, furniture, topography, and so on.
3 Import the PhotoView image of your own backyard. 4 On the Design window, move the PhotoView image to a position where it can be viewed from your virtual home.
Note: In this example, the PhotoView image is the line at the bottom of the Design window.
Note: PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window as lines, similar to interior walls.
Right in Your Own Backyard

In TurboFloorPlan you can even look out the window of your new home design and see your own backyard. By taking a digital picture of your backyard, you can position it so when you view your design in 3D View, youre home. To view your own backyard 1 Create your home design, using tools and techniques outlined in previous chapters. 2 On the Window menu, click Split View or click the Split View button.
Chapter 29
Estimator
TurboFloorPlan keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator continually and automatically tallies your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable, printable, exportable spreadsheet format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from TurboFloorPlan, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part of your design.
Launching Estimator
TurboFloorPlan includes an extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator inventories almost every feature of your design. Prices may be higher during the peak building season and will depend on the part of the country where you are building your new home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor. Launching Estimator 1 Launch Estimator by clicking Launch PowerTool on the Design menu, then choose Estimator and click Launch.
As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each plant type, including sod, roofing materials, and roof trusses, and computes the grand total for the entire project. You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job. This may be especially useful if you plan to renovate just one or two rooms. Estimator calculates each room separately, too.
2 Click the Dry Wall Estimation option you want. By default, Estimator will estimate dry wall usage, without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Click Exclude Window and Door Area, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation. 3 Click the Wall Material Estimation options you want. By default, Estimator will make estimations, without regard to where doors or windows are placed or whether or not the walls have base trim. Click Exclude Window and Door Area and/or Exclude Base Trim Area, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation. 4 Click the Insulation option you want. By default, Estimator estimates insulation needed, without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Click Exclude Window and Door Area, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation. 5 Click the Calculate Roofing Squares option you want. By default, Estimator will estimate the number of roofing squares needed for your design. Click Off, if you do not need this calculation. 6 Click the Floor & Deck Estimation options you want. By default, Estimator makes floor and deck estimates without regard to where cutout areas are placed. Click Exclude Floor Cutout Area or Exclude Deck Cutout
185
Chapter
29 Estimator
To reset a color back to the default
Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation. 7 Click OK. 8 (optional) Click Exit PowerTool.
Click the Reset button next to the feature you want to reset to the default color. Then click OK.
To reset all colors
Customizing the Spreadsheet

You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. TurboFloorPlan makes this easy. You can assign any color you want to certain parts of the spreadsheet. To customize colors 1 On the Options menu, click Set Colors. The Colors dialog box is displayed.
Click the Reset All button. Then click OK.
Selecting a Plan Tab

Estimator will automatically display features and materials used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck. To select a plan tab 1 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the materials list for that tab appears. 2 (optional) Click Estimates on the 2D Menu, then click the individual plan you want.
Calculating Construction Costs

Estimator automatically calculates the total square footage for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor. To calculate construction costs 1 Click the green cell next to Construction Square Foot Cost. 2 Type the estimated cost. 3 Press ENTER. TurboFloorPlan automatically calculates the total and places it in the grey-shaded cell across from Total Cost.
2 Click the color block next to the feature you want to customize. The Color dialog box is displayed.
Completing the Various Schedules

3 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color. 4 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color. 5 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary. 6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the color block on the Colors dialog box. 7 Click OK. The color is applied to the spreadsheet. Estimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab foundation, to light switches, everything is displayed on individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that you obtain from a building supply company near you. To complete Estimator schedules 1 Click the green-shaded cell for the Unit Cost of each material or feature of your design. 2 Type the estimated cost.
Creating a Master Pricelist
3 Press ENTER. TurboFloorPlan automatically calculates the total and displays it in the Total Cost column, then keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule. Note: Use the arrow keys, on your keyboard, to move around your spreadsheet.
To open a master pricelist 1 On the View Menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.
Creating a Master Pricelist

Estimator saves the prices you enter in a master pricelist file to make it easy to create a new estimate, after making alterations to your design. In addition, you can create individual pricelists for each building supply company, vendor, or wholesaler that you make purchases from. To store a master pricelist 1 On the View Menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed. 2 Click Open Master List. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the costs from the source where you plan to purchase materials. 3 Click Save as a Master when you have finished updating your prices. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3 Type a file name in the File Name text box or click to select the Master List you want to use. Click Open.
Exporting a Pricelist
You can export the information contained in an Estimator spreadsheet so you can use the information in other programs, such as Microsoft Excel or Quickbooks. You can even display your pricelist on the web! To export a pricelist 1 Click Export on the File menu, then click either Excel File, Comma Delimited, Tab Delimited, QuickBooks Item List, or HTML. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 4 Type a file name in the File Name text box; the extension is automatically added. 5 Click Save. 6 (optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save. 2 Type a file name in the File Name text box; the extension is automatically added. Click Save.
187
Chapter
29 Estimator
Note: All necessary graphics are copied to the directory where you save the HTML file. You will need to upload all files to your web server to make them available to be viewed by others.
Printing a Pricelist
You can print pricelists any way you need them. There are many ways to customize your estimations. To print a pricelist 1 Click Print on the File menu. The Print Preview Setup dialog box is displayed.
2 Click to check the options you want to have printed and uncheck any options you dont want to print. 3 Click Portrait or Landscape. 4 Click Printer Setup to specify what printer you want to use. For more information on printer setup, see Printing Floor Plans, which begins on page 51. 5 Click Preview to see what the page will look like, before you actually print it. 6 Click Print when you have finished setting the options.
Part 6
3D Custom Workshop
This CAD-based drawing program lets you build virtually any object; start from scratch or modify existing objects from the extensive TurboFloorPlan library.
Chapter 30: Chapter 31: Chapter 32: Chapter 33: Chapter 34:
Before You Draw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing 2D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191 199 215 231 239
Chapter 30
Before You Draw in 3D

When you start 3D Custom Workshop, a new blank drawing grid is displayed with the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors will be those that were assigned in the home design program, as will the unit of measurement (inches or metric). If you start 3D Custom Workshop by double clicking an object in your home design program, that object is displayed on the design window.
To open an existing file 1 On the File menu, click Open or press CTRL+O. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it. 4 Click Open. To open objects using drag-and-drop 1 Click the Objects tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects. 2 (optional) Click the arrow next to Living at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library. 3 Scroll to view the available objects. 4 Click the object you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window. 5 (optional) Click the object you just placed to select it; then click and drag it to another location on your design window.
If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open to display it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop displays it in a new window. The changes you make to an object occur only in your computers memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing, using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing with a new name, use Save As.
Importing 3DS Files

With 3D Custom Workshop, you can import 3DS files. After importing, you can alter them to suit your design. To import a 3DS file 1 On the File menu, click Import 3DS. The Open dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to import or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to import, click to select it. 4 Click Open.
Opening a New File

Opening a new file creates a new blank drawing grid with the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors will be those that were assigned in the home design program. To open a new file
On the File menu, click New or press CTRL+N. An empty drawing grid is displayed.
Note: If you were working on an object, you will be prompted to save your work.
Opening an Existing File

Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, making it available for you to edit or print.
191
Chapter
30 Before You Draw in 3D

6 (optional) Click a Preview Camera Angle radio button to change the direction from which the object is displayed on the Preview Bar. 7 Click Save. Note: The object always appears on a light blue background.
Saving a File
When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after youve completed any work you wouldnt want to redo. When you click the Save command, 3D Custom Workshop saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks. To save an existing file
Exporting Files
With 3D Custom Workshop, you can export your design. Files can be exported to a variety of formats in Textured, Wireframe, and ClearView modes. To export a 3D rendering 1 Click the Rendering Style button to toggle between Shaded and Wireframe, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click the rendering style you want. 2 On the File menu, click Export 3D, then click to select the format you want. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.
On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.
To save a new, unnamed file 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the POB extension. 3 Click Save. To save an object to an object library 1 On the File menu, click Save to Object Library. The Save to Object Library dialog box is displayed.
3 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension, then click OK. Note: The background of the file will be white, regardless of what color is specified in 3D Custom Workshop. 2 Select the Library Location where you want the object filed. 3 Type the Object Name in that dialog box. This will appear in the Status Bar when the mouse is held over the object on the Preview Bar. 4 (optional) Type a description of the object in the Object Description text box. 5 (optional) Type keywords, by which to search for the object, in the Search Keywords text box. Note: To view recently saved information, click the arrow button to the right of the text box. To export to 7.0 3D Custom Workshop format 1 On the File menu, click Export, 7.0 Custom Workshop Object. The dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save. To export to 8.0 3D Custom Workshop format 1 On the File menu, click Export, 8.0 Custom Workshop Object. The dialog box is displayed.
Printing Objects
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save. To export to 12.0 3D Custom Workshop format 1 On the File menu, click Export, 12.0 Custom Workshop Object. The dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save. To export to 14.0 3D Custom Workshop format 1 On the File menu, click Export, 14.0 Custom Workshop Object. The dialog box is displayed. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save. 4 (optional) Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed. 5 (optional) Note: This Properties menu is from a popular color printer. Refer to your printers documentation on the use of its specific features. 6 Select the paper orientation. 7 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal). 8 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media. 9 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click Print. To print in rendered mode 1 On the File menu, click Print, then click the Quality you want to use.
Printing Objects
3D Custom Workshop prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. Your object can be printed in Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes. In rendered mode, you have the choice of four qualities. To print in Wireframe mode
Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wireframe.
1 On the File menu, click Print, then click Print Wireframe.
2 On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the printer name. 3 Click the printer you want to use. 4 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed. 5 Select the paper orientation. 6 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal). 7 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media. 8 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click Print.
2 On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the printer name. 3 Click the printer you want to use.
193
Chapter

8 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle. Notice the width, height, depth, and elevation are displayed below the workspace.
Drawing Grids
By using the Drawing Grids in 3D Custom Workshop you can work on any object from three distinct 3D angles. Each grid controls two axes. You can also draw or edit in 2D from any of six directions, which will make editing and detailed alignment simple. The 3D drawing grids are the Front, Floor, and Side grids. The X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions are the dominant axes when drawing on the Front Grid. While the Floor Grid controls the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions, the Side Grid controls the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. Using these grids in concert will give you the ability to design anything you want.
Drawing on the Floor Grid

From the Floor Grid you concentrate on the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the Y (Height) axis. To draw on the floor grid 1 Click the Floor Grid tool on the toolbar. (alternate) On the Design menu, click Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis). 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
Drawing on the Front Grid

Using the Front Grid, you can concentrate on the X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions. You can extrude objects along the Z (Depth) axis. You will be able to tell by the tighter grid pattern which drawing grid is active. To draw on the front grid 1 Click the Front Grid Tool on the toolbar. (alternate) On the Design menu, click Draw on Front Grid (X-Y Axis). 2 On the View menu, click to check 3D Design tools. 3 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
4 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and Z axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button. 6 Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Y Axis to the height you want. 7 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle. Notice the width, height, depth, and elevation are displayed below the workspace.
5 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Z Axis to the depth you want.
Drawing on the Side Grid

The Side Grid activates the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the X (Width) axis.
Changing Grid Settings
To draw on the side grid 1 Click the Side Grid icon from the toolbar. (alternate) On the Design menu, select Draw on Side Grid (Z-Y Axis). 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
2 Under Gridlines, type Horizontal and Vertical measurements. 3 (optional) Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements for the Snap Grid. 4 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the Z and Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button. 6 Move the cursor, to extrude the rectangle along the X Axis to the height you want. 7 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle. Notice the width, height, depth, and elevation are displayed below the workspace. 4 Click OK. To turn off the snap grid
On the Grid Toolbar, click the Snap Grid On/ Off Toggle, or on the Design menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid.
To hide the grid from view
On the Design menu, click to uncheck Grid Visible. If Grid Visible is checked it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.

By default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square on the floor plan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized Grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the components simple. To keep things from slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain feature. To change grid settings 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.
To toggle the grid constrain 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 2 Select to enable, or deselect to disable, the grid constraint. To change the grid size 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.
195
Chapter

To move an object by nudging 1 Click the object you want to move. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right), or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Using 2D Views
2D Views work in harmony with the 3D Views. The 2D Top and Bottom Views are used in tandem with the 3D Floor Grid; the Front and Back Views are used with the 3D Front Grid; the Left and Right Views work with the Side Grid. 2 Under Gridlines, type Width, Height, and Depth measurements in the corresponding text fields, then click OK. The 2D Views make complex alignment straightforward and simple. It is easy to toggle back and forth, using the pop-up menu. All 2D views work in the same manner. To edit using 2D view
Setting a Nudge Distance

With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left, and right selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as small as one inch may be defined. To change the nudge distance 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.
1 Click the Objects tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects. 2 Click the arrow next to Living at the top of the Preview Bar and click Gameroom and Music. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar. 3 Click to select an object on the Preview Bar. As you pass the mouse over objects, their names appear on the Status Bar. 4 Click-and-drag the object into the design window.
5 On the View menu, click 2D View, Top, or right-click anywhere on the design window, then click 2D Top View on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The object is displayed from a top view. 2 There are three pre-set nudge distances. Click the radio button corresponding to the nudge distance you want. 3 (optional) Type a custom distance in one of the text fields, then click the radio button. 4 Click OK.
Elevation Slider
Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements. Accessing the elevation slider 1 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed. 2 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool again to hide the Elevation Slider. 6 Click the object to select it. 7 Click-and-drag a corner of the object to reshape it. The dimensions will appear in the Status Bar, as you reshape the object. Note: To specify an exact elevation where you want your object drawn, be sure the Elevation Slider is open and set to that height. All subsequent shapes will be set to that elevation. To use the elevation slider 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to elevate. 3 Click the Elevation Slider, at the left side of your window, and move the elevation control up or down until the object is in the correct position.
8 Release the mouse button. 9 Right-click, then click Reset View on the pop-up menu that is displayed to view the resized object.
To specify an exact elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK. To enable the working elevation
Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Enable Working Elevation.
10 On the File menu, click Exit & Return to TurboFloorPlan, then click Yes to place the object in the center of your design.
To set the working elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Working Elevation from the popup menu that is displayed.
Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The
197
Chapter
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK. To set the elevation of a group of objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate. 3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
4 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches separated with a hyphen. Click OK. Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the objects were originally located at various elevations.
Chapter 31
Drawing 2D Entities
You may find it easier to begin your design in 2D and add the third dimension later. You will find the 2D design tools are extremely useful for this technique. Once youve drawn a 2D shape, you can convert it to 3D, creating as much depth as you want in any direction necessary.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button.
These tools are the counterpart to the 3D drawing tools and work similarly. For more information on 3D drawing tools, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 25. The 2D toolset can be used in 3D view or a 2D view from a specific direction. In this section, we will explore the uses of each 2D drawing tool. In addition, the Curve Tension technique is explained.
Drawing a 2D Oval
In ellipse drawing mode you will be able to draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches, planters, rugs, and so on. To draw an oval 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the oval. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer.
Drawing a 2D Rectangle
In rectangle drawing mode you will be able to draw squares and rectangles. You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters, and so on. To draw a rectangle 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the oval until it reaches the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
199
Chapter
31 Drawing 2D Entities
7 Hold the mouse button down and extend the multigon to the size you want. The radius will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 8 Release the mouse button.
6 Release the mouse button. 7 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to draw a perfect circle.
Drawing a 2D Multigon
In multigon drawing mode you will be able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs, and so on. To draw a multigon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options The dialog box is displayed.
Drawing a 2D Polygon
In polygon drawing mode you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons, and so on. To draw a polygon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your polygon.
5 Type the number of equal-length sides you need and click OK. 6 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point (center) of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. 6 Double-click to end drawing mode.
Drawing a 2D Closed Arc

In closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, drop-leaf tables, and so on. To draw a closed arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2.
Drawing a 2D Circular Closed Arc
2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

In circular closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw a closed shape of any rounded item. You will find this tool useful when drawing cabinet mouldings, decorative edges, and so on. To draw a circular closed arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Circular Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc. 8 Click to end drawing mode.
Drawing a 2D Closed Curve

In closed curve drawing mode, you can draw enclosed curved objects and areas. You will find this useful for creating curved inlays for cabinets or furniture. To draw a closed curve 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Closed Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your curve. 5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
201
Chapter
Drawing a 2D Open Arc

In open arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides, and so on. To draw an open arc Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90-degrees. 7 Double-click to end drawing mode. 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
Drawing a 2D Open Polygon

In open polygon drawing mode, you will be able to draw polygons with an open side. You will find this tool useful for creating complex, open-eneded shapes and objects. To draw an open polygon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Open Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your polygon. 5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90-degrees.
Drawing a 2D Circular Arc

In circular arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an open shape of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative edges, barrel planters, and so on. To draw a circular arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90-degrees. 7 Double-click to end drawing mode. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
Drawing a 2D Line
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.
3 Click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the line to the length you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.
Drawing a 2D Curve
In curve drawing mode you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor grills, and so on. To draw a curve 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 8 Click to end drawing mode. 3 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
Drawing a 2D Line
In line drawing mode you will be able to draw straight lines of any length. You will find this tool useful when drawing angular details to cabinets, tables, and so on. To draw a line 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use.
203
Chapter
Accessing the elevation slider 1 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed. 2 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool again to hide the Elevation Slider. Note: To specify an exact elevation where you want your object drawn, be sure the Elevation Slider is open and set to that height. All subsequent shapes will be set to that elevation. To use the elevation slider 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to elevate. 3 Click the Elevation Slider, at the left side of your window, and move the elevation control up or down until the object is in the correct position.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 5 Double-click to end drawing mode.
Drawing a Hollow Object

By default, objects are drawn with their center filled, or capped. You can uncap objects to create a hollow shape. To draw a hollow object 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+2. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the 2D drawing tool you want. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click and drag to define the shape. 5 Click the Extrude Tool. 6 Click and drag the object to extrude to the desired shape. 7 On the Properties Bar, click the UnCapped radio button.
To specify an exact elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2 Type the neccessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK. To set the working elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Working Elevation from the popup menu that is displayed.
Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements.
2 Type the neccessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, spearated witha hyphen. Click OK. To set the elevation of a group of objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate.
3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Curve Tension set at 10:
4 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches spearated with a hyphen. Click OK. Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the objects were originally located at various elevations. Curve Tension set at 20:

To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve. To change curve tension 1 Click an object to select it. 2 On the Options Menu, click Curve Smoothing, Curve Tension. The Curve Tension dialog box is displayed. To control curve-drawing smoothness 1 On the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click and drag the 2D Curve-Drawing Smoothness slider to decrease or increase the drawing smoothness. 3 Click OK. Note: When changed, the drawing smoothness affects all curves in the drawing. 3 Type the amount of tension that you want. 4 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied. Examples: Default Curve Tension (5):
Drawing from Corner

Draw from Corner, along with Draw from Center, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only. To draw from corner 1 On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or click on the Draw from Corner Tool. Note: Draw from Corner mode is the 3D Custom Workshops default drawing style. 2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
205
Chapter
3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the cornerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
Enclosing an Open Object

You can qucikly change an open-ended object to a closed object with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Just as easily, you can change a closed object to be open-ended. To close an open-ended object 1 Select the object you want to open. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. 2 Click the Closed radio button. The object automatically becomes closed off. To open a closed object
4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the opposite corner of the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button to end.
1 Select the object you want to open. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. 2 Click the Open radio button. The object automatically becomes opens on one edge.
Drawing from Center

Draw from Center, along with Draw from Corner, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Center makes drawing concentric objects a breeze. Draw from Center is applicable with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only. To draw from center 1 On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or click on the Draw from Center Tool. 2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
Extruding a 2D Object
Once you draw an object in 2D you can add a third dimension at any time. The Extrude Tool makes this a straight-forward process, by simply clicking and dragging to the desired dimension. To extrude an object with more precision, you can use the Extrude dialog box to define the segment spacing, and how many segments to which you want to extrude To manually extrude a 2D object 1 On the View menu, click Reset View or right-click anywhere on the design window, then click Reset View on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 Click once on the object to be extruded. Selection handles are displayed.
4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 5 Release the mouse button to end.
3 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Extrude Tool. 4 Click an object handle; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to extrude. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar as you extrude.
Revolving a 2D Object
To revolve a 2D object 1 Click the object to be revolved. 2 On the Edit menu, click Revolve. The Revolve dialog box is displayed.
5 Release the mouse button to end extrusion mode. Note: Using the Extrude Tool always extrudes the selection perpendicular to the active grid. To extrude an object by a specified amount 1 Click the object to be extruded. Selection handles are displayed. 2 On the Edit menu, click Extrude. The Extrude dialog box is displayed.
3 Type parameters in the dialog box. Measurements are from -360 to 360-degrees or -6.28 to 6.28 radians. The Radius is measured in the scale you have defined.
3 Type the number of segments to which you want to extude the object in the # of Segments text box. 4 Type the value you want each segment to hold in the Segment Spacing tex box. 5 Click OK Note: Specifying an extrusion value using the Extrude dialog box always extrudes the selection perpendicular to the grid on which it was drawn.
Revolving a 2D Object
Another way to add a third dimension is with the Revolve command. This command is useful when creating table legs, lamps, vases, and so on. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring circular distances. One radian, sometimes called a pi radian, equals 180 degrees. Two pi radians equal 360 degrees. To convert degrees to radians, multiply degrees by Pi, divided by 180. To convert radians into degrees, multiply radians by 180, divided by Pi.
Smoothing a Revolving Object

When a revolving object is created, the shading starts over with each segment; this can increase render times. Once youve created a revolving object, you can smooth out the shading to create a more fluid appearance and, in turn, speed up rendering. To smooth a revolving object 1 Click to select the object. The Properties Bar is displayed. 2 Under Shading, click the Smooth radio button.
207
Chapter
To use point selection mode 1 On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. The design window changes to reflect wireframe view.
Selecting Points within an Object

The Select In Polygon Tool is a versatile tool which allows you to select objects or points that lie within another object. This tools allows you to click points to define a selection area. To select points within an object 1 Click the Select In Polygon Tool. 2 Click and drag to define the selection area, around the points or objects you want selected. 3 Once youve finished the selection area, right-click to select each point or object inside the area. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 Click a section of the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it. Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click Textured. To select all points
Right-click on the object and click Select All Points.
Using Object Selection Mode

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To use object selection mode 1 On the Options menu, click Object Selection or click on the Object Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. 2 Click the object and drag it into the new position.
Adding and Removing Points

You can reshape an object, and gain more control over its appearance by adding or removing points. To do so, you must be in Point Selection mode. To add a point to an object 1 On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. The design window changes to reflect wireframe view. 2 Right-click on the segment where you want to add a point. A shortcut menu is displayed. 3 Click Add Point. A point is added to the object where your cursor was positioned. To remove a point from an object 1 On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. The design window changes to reflect wireframe view.
Using Point Selection Mode

In point selection mode, you are able to move each edge individually in your drawing. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.
Tracing an Imported Image
2 Right-click on the segment where you want to remove a point. A shortcut menu is displayed. 3 Click Remove Point. The point is removed from the object.
2 Under (X-Y Axis) Front Grid Image, click the Set Image button. The Open dialog box is displayed. 3 In the File Name box, type the name of the image file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and click Open. The image is displayed in the Preview Box. 5 (optional) Click the Image Visible checkbox to turn on the images visibility. 6 Click OK. Note: To view the image, you must be in 2D Front View and WireFrame rendering style. To import a trace image to the side grid 1 On the Design menu, click Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Under (Z-Y Axis) Side Grid Image, click the Set Image button. The Open dialog box is displayed. 3 In the File Name box, type the name of the image file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and click Open. The image is displayed in the Preview Box. 5 (optional) Click the Image Visible checkbox to turn on the images visibility. 6 Click OK.
Tracing an Imported Image

If you have an image you want to re-create and use in your drawing, for instance a scanned piece of furniture or door design you like, 3D Custom Workshop lets you trace objects directly over that image. Simply import the image to the grid where you want it, then use the tools to trace the image. To import a trace image to the floor grid 1 On the Design menu, click Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 Under (X-Z Axis) Floor Grid Image, click the Set Image button. The Open dialog box is displayed. 3 In the File Name box, type the name of the image file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and click Open. The image is displayed in the Preview Box. 5 (optional) Click the Image Visible checkbox to turn on the images visibility. 6 Click OK. Note: To view the image, you must be in 2D Top View and WireFrame rendering style. To import a trace image to the front grid 1 On the Design menu, click Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note: To view the image, you must be in 2D Left View and WireFrame rendering style. To resize a trace image 1 On the Design menu, click Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Type the width and height you want in the text boxes corresponding to the image you are resizing. 3 Click OK To control the visibility of a trace image 1 On the Design menu, click Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to check the Image Visible checkbox corresponding to the image you want to view. When the checkbox is not checked, the trace image is not visible.
209
Chapter
3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Point Handles color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using Point Selection, points are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Background color. 5 Click OK. The background is now displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the grid color 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Grid Color color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Grid Color color. 5 Click OK. The grid is now displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance new objects
Note: To view an image, you must set your 2D view to that particular grid, and use the WireFrame rendering style.
Controlling Default Colors

Using the Custom Options dialog box, you can control default colors of specific aspects of 3D Custom Workshop, such as wireframe, point handles, grid color, new objects, and more. To change the appearance of wireframe 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Wireframe color. The Colors dialog box is displayed.
3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Wireframe color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects in WireFrame, they are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of point handles 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Point Handles color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 210 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the New Object color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the New Object color. 5 Click OK. New objects are displayed in the color you chose.
Applying Materials
To change the appearance of the ClearView foreground 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Foreground color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Foreground color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the foreground is displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of ClearView background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Background color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the background is displayed in the color you chose. To change the profile color 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Profile 3D Objects color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Profile 3D Objects color. 5 Click OK. Profiles are displayed in the color you chose. To reset default colors 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Under Colors, click the Reset To Default button. 3 Click OK.
Applying Materials
Just like applying color, its easy to apply the appropriate material. 3D Custom Workshop includes both the Library and the Custom Material Library. You can drag-and-drop materials onto surfaces on the design window. To apply material 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar displays materials available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the Materials style menu, then click to check the material you want, for instance brick, stucco, stone, siding, and so on. Options of the selected material will be displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available materials. 5 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the surface where you want it applied. Note: To increase the accuracy of applying materials, it may help to zoom in closer to what you are texturing. To apply custom materials 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar displays materials available for placement. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then select Custom Material Library from the menu.
211
Chapter
4 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Custom Materials Library dropdown menu, then select a library. The Preview Bar displays custom material options. 5 Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface where you want it applied.
Note: The actual name of the paint is displayed, in the upper right, for ease in purchasing the correct color. To apply color from the color ramp 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available colors. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then click Color Ramp. Twenty-five shades of the same color appear in the Preview Bar. 4 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, drag the slider, below the color spectrum, to change the color family. 5 Scroll to view the variations of that color. 6 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The color you selected is applied. To apply custom colors 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar displays colors available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring, or whichever category you prefer. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available colors. 5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the surface where you want it applied. For more information, see To define a custom color, which begins on page 213.

With 3D Custom Workshop, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks. To apply paint 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available paint colors. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the available Paint Libraries. Click to select which one you want to use. The paint colors are displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available paint colors. 5 Click the paint color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The paint you selected is applied. 6 (optional) To view larger paint chips, click the Library drop-down menu at the top of the Preview Bar, as in Step 2 above, and then click Paint Chooser from the drop down menu. The Paint Chooser is displayed.
Searching for Colors or Materials
To define a custom color 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display colors available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Colors drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Summer. The Summer color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar or right-click and click Assign Color, from the menu. The Color dialog box is displayed.
2 Right-click on the color you want to reset, and click Reset Color from the menu that is displayed. To apply a series of the same color 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors or Materials tab. The Preview Bar will display colors or materials available for placement. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose AutoClick Placement. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply. 5 Click each surface where you want the color or material applied. 6 Click the right mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied to each surface.

If you see a color or material you want to match, or have forgetten which library the color or material you want is stored in, you can use the Select Material/Color Tool to automatically find the library in which the color or material appears. 5 Click one of the Basic colors, Custom colors, or a color from the matrix to select a color. 6 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color. 7 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar. To reset a customized color 1 Click the Colors tab. To find a material or color 1 Click the Select Material/Color Tool. Your cursor changes to an eye-dropper as you move it over the design window. 2 Click the material or color you want to search for. The material, or color, is displayed on the Preview Bar.
213
Chapter
Chapter 32
Drawing 3D Entities
3D Custom Workshop is an extremely powerful CAD (computer-aided design) program. Whether you want to draw angular objects like cabinets, desks, and so on, or curved objects like lamps, mirrors, and so on, there is a tool to match each task.
5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. In this chapter, each drawing tools function will be explained. You will also learn the Draw from Center, Draw from Corner, Object Editing, and Point Editing techniques, which will make drawing any object you want easier. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle.
Drawing a 3D Rectangle
In rectangle drawing mode, you can draw cubes and boxes. You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters, and so on. To draw a rectangle 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.
8 Click to end.
Drawing a 3D Oval
In ellipse drawing mode, you can draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches, planters, rugs, and so on. To draw an oval 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
215
Chapter
3 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the oval. A rubber-band oval is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the oval to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval. During the extruding process, only the perimeter will be visible. The 3D oval is displayed once drawing mode has ended.
5 Type the number of equal-length sides you want, then click OK. 6 Click on the design window to define the start point (center) of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer. Note: Although you can define any number of sides, the more sides you specify, the more the multigon will begin to look like a circle.
8 Click to end. 9 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to draw a perfect circle from its centerpoint.
Drawing a 3D Multigon
In multigon drawing mode, you will be able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs, and so on. To draw a multigon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use.
7 Hold the mouse button down while you draw the multigon to the size you want. The radius measurement will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 8 Release the mouse button. 9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the multigon.
Drawing a 3D Polygon
8 Click to end. 10 Click to end.
Drawing a 3D Closed Arc Drawing a 3D Polygon

In polygon drawing mode, you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons, and so on. To draw a polygon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of the polygon. In closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, drop-leaf tables, and so on. To draw a closed arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the shape. 6 Double-click to end drawing the 2D shape. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
217
Chapter
8 Click to end. 9 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

In circular closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw closed circular objects that have a cutout area. You will find this tool useful when drawing mouldings for cabinets and so on. To draw a circular closed arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Circular Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc. 8 Click to end drawing the 2D shape. 9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
10 Click to end.
Drawing a 3D Closed Curve

In closed curve drawing mode, you can draw enclosed curved objects and areas. You will find this useful for creating curved cabinets or furniture pieces. 5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want. To draw a closed curve 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Closed Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your curve. 5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
6 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
8 Click to end. 8 Click to end.
Drawing a 3D Open Arc

In open arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides, and so on. To draw an open arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

In open polygon drawing mode, you will be able to draw polygons with an open side. You will find this tool useful for creating fences, bay windows, and other unique open-ended shapes and objects. To draw an open polygon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Open Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your polygon. 5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
219
Chapter
5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees. 7 Release the mouse button. 8 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.
9 Click to end.
8 Click to end drawing the 2D shape. 9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
Drawing a 3D Circular Arc

In circular arc drawing mode, you can draw an arc of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative edges, barrel planters, and so on. To draw a circular arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc. 220 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
10 Click to end.
Drawing a 3D Plane
Drawing a 3D Plane
In plane drawing mode, you will be able to draw flat planes to the size you want. You will find this tool useful when adding angular details to cabinets and so on. To draw a plane 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Plane Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.
tool useful when drawing curved ceilings, outdoor grills, and so on. To draw a curve 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape. Although the lines will initially appear angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode.
5 Double-click to end. 5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the line in the direction and to the length you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the plane. 6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.
7 Click to end. 8 Click to end. 9 (optional) Press SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.
Drawing a Hollow Object

By default, objects are drawn with their center filled, or capped. You can uncap objects to create a hollow shape. To draw a hollow object 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar or press CTRL+3.
Drawing a 3D Curve
In curve drawing mode, you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this
221
Chapter
To use object selection mode 1 On the Options menu, click Object Selection or click on the Object Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. 2 Click the object and drag it into the new position.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid you want to use. 3 Click the 2D drawing tool you want. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 4 Click and drag to define the shape. 5 Click the Extrude Tool. 6 Click and drag the object to extrude to the desired shape. 7 On the Properties Bar, click the UnCapped radio button.
Using Point Selection Mode

In Point Selection Mode, you are able to move each edge individually in your drawing. While it is easy to move an entire object in Object Selection Mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using Point Selection Mode. To use point selection mode
Enclosing an Open Object

You can quickly change an open-ended object to a closed object with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Just as easily, you can change a closed object to be open-ended. To close an open-ended object 1 Select the object you want to open. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. 2 Click the Closed radio button. The object automatically becomes closed off. To open a closed object 1 Select the object you want to open. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. 2 Click the Open radio button. The object automatically becomes open on one edge.
1 On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection Tool in the lower left corner of the window. The design window changes to reflect Wireframe view.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 Click a section of the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it. Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click Textured. To select all points
Using Object Selection Mode

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in Object Selection Mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in Point Selection Mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.
Right-click on the object and click Select Object Points.
Drawing from Corner
To select all points on a segment
7 Click to end.
Right-click on a line segment where you want to select all points and click Select Segment. All the points along that segment are selected. OR
Drawing from Center

Draw from Center, along with Draw from Corner, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Center makes drawing concentric objects a breeze. Draw from Center is applicable with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only. To draw from center 1 On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or click on the Draw From Center Tool. 2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
Right-click a point where you want to select all points of the segment and click Select Segment Points. All the points along that segment are selected.
To select all points along an extrusion path
Right-click a point and click Select Extrude Points. All of the points along the extrusion path are selected.
Drawing from Corner

Draw from Corner, along with Draw from Center, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables, and most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only. To draw from corner 1 On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or click on the Draw From Corner Tool. Note: Draw from Corner mode is the 3D Custom Workshops default drawing style. 2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define the cornerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. 4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the opposite corner of the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse button. 6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle. 7 Click to end.

Using the Custom Options dialog box, you can control default colors of specific aspects of 3D Custom Workshop, such as Wireframe, point handles, grid color, new objects, and more. To change the appearance of wireframe 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
5 Release the mouse button. 6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle.
223
Chapter
2 Click the Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Background color. 5 Click OK. The background is now displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the grid color
1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Grid Color color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Grid Color color. 5 Click OK. The grid is now displayed in the color you chose.
3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Wireframe color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects in WireFrame, they are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of point handles 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Point Handles color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Point Handles color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using Point Selection, points are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
To change the appearance new objects 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the New Object color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the New Object color. 5 Click OK. New objects are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the ClearView foreground 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Foreground color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Foreground color.
Applying Materials
5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the foreground is displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of ClearView background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Background color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the background is displayed in the color you chose. To change the profile color 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Profile 3D Objects color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Profile 3D Objects color. 5 Click OK. Profiles are displayed in the color you chose. To reset default colors 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Under Colors, click the Reset To Default button. 3 Click OK.
2 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar displays materials available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the Materials style menu, then click to check the material you want, for instance brick, stucco, stone, siding, and so on. Options of the selected material will be displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available materials. 5 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the surface where you want it applied. Note: To increase the accuracy of applying materials, it may help to zoom in closer to what you are texturing. To apply custom materials 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar displays materials available for placement. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then select Custom Material Library from the menu. 4 At the top of the Preview Bar, click Custom Materials Library dropdown menu, then select a library. The Preview Bar displays custom material options. 5 Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface where you want it applied.
Applying Materials
Just like applying color, its easy to apply the appropriate material. 3D Custom Workshop includes both the Library and the Custom Material Library. You can drag-and-drop materials onto surfaces on the design window. To apply material 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

With 3D Custom Workshop, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks.
225
Chapter
6 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The color you selected is applied. To apply custom colors 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar displays colors available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring, or whichever category you prefer. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available colors. 5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the surface where you want it applied. 6 To customize a color, see To define a custom color, on page 226. To define a custom color 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display colors available for placement. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Colors drop-down menu to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Summer. The Summer color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar or right-click and click Assign Color, from the menu. The Color dialog box is displayed.
To apply paint 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available paint colors. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Style drop-down menu to display the available Paint Libraries. Click to select which one you want to use. The paint colors are displayed on the Preview Bar. 4 Scroll to view the available paint colors. 5 Click the paint color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the exterior walls of your home, in the 3D View window. The paint you selected is applied. 6 (optional) To view larger paint chips, click the Library drop-down menu at the top of the Preview Bar, as in Step 2 above, and then click Paint Chooser from the drop down menu. The Paint Chooser is displayed.
Note: The actual name of the paint is displayed, in the upper right, for ease in purchasing the correct color. To apply color from the color ramp 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display available colors. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the Library dropdown menu, then click Color Ramp. Twenty-five shades of the same color appear in the Preview Bar. 4 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, drag the slider, below the color spectrum, to change the color family. 5 Scroll to view the variations of that color.
5 Click one of the Basic colors, Custom colors, or a color from the matrix to select a color.
Controlling Application of Color or Material
6 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color. 7 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar. To reset a customized color 1 Click the Colors tab. 2 Right-click on the color you want to reset, and click Reset Color from the menu that is displayed.
Controlling Application of Color or Material

With 3D Custom Workshop you can control how colors and materials are applied to your design.
5 Continue to drag and drop onto each surface where you want the color or material.
By default the Single Plane function is selected, where the color or material is applied only to the place where you click. The Wrap Single Segment option allows you to apply a color or material to a single segment along part of an object, as objects are made up of multiple segments, in most cases. You can also choose to Wrap All Segments with a selected color to material. This option covers all of the segments that make up a specific piece of an object. The Grouped Apply method applies the color or material to all of the objects segments at once. Matching Apply replaces all like colors or materials with the new one. To Use Single Plane Apply 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Color or Material tab. Options appear in the Preview Bar. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose Single Plane. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied only to the place where you click.
To Use Segment Apply 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Color or Material tab. Options appear in the Preview Bar. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap Single Segment. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied only to the single segment where you click.
227
Chapter
To Use Matching Apply 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Color or Material tab. Options appear in the Preview Bar. 3 Apply one material to multiple surfaces.
To Use All Segment Apply 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Color or Material tab. Options appear in the Preview Bar. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap All Segments. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all of the segments where you click.
4 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose Matching. 5 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all places matching the material you are replacing. To Use Grouped Apply 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Color or Material tab. Options appear in the Preview Bar. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose Entire Group. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to the entire object. To apply a series of the same color 1 Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. 2 Click the Colors or Materials tab. The Preview Bar will display colors or materials available for placement. 3 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose AutoClick Placement. 4 Click the color or material you want to apply. 5 Click each surface where you want the color or material applied. 6 Click the right mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied to each surface.
Note: To control how shadows are rendered across an object with many facets, use Planar Mapping on the Options Menu. Surface Mapping will apply the shadow to each facet individually. 228 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design. After youve created your palette, you can access it while working in 3D Custom Workshop. To use your palette

If you see a color or material you want to match, or have forgotten which library the color or material you want is stored in, you can use the Select Material/Color Tool to automatically find the library in which the color or material appears. To find a material or color 1 Click the Select Material/Color Tool. Your cursor changes to an eye-dropper as you move it over the design window. 2 Click the material or color you want to search for. The material, or color, is displayed on the Preview Bar.
Click the Palette tab and drag and drop materials onto the surfaces where you want them. For more information, see Using the Decorator Palette, which begins on page 83.
229
Chapter
Chapter 33
Editing 3D Objects
3D Custom Workshop makes it extremely easy to change objects once they are drawn. In this section, you will find instructions on techniques that make rotating, resizing, and so on, very simple.
you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object. You will also learn how to use layers, lock and unlock; in addition, youll learn to create groups that will make complex objects much more manageable. The flip and mirror techniques are also described and are useful when you need perfectly symmetrical objects. To skew an object a specified amount 1 Click the object to skew. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Double-click the Skew Tool. The Skew dialog box is displayed.
Applying Skew
To skew an object means to slant it along a selected axis. This is a useful tool for adding beveled edges to counters, diagonal legs to tables, and so on. To skew an object freely 1 Click the object you want to skew. Selection handles appear around the object. 3 Type the Horizontal and Vertical values to which you want the object skewed, in the corresponding text boxes. 4 Click OK.
Rotating an Object
With the Rotate Tool you can easily spin an object around any point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn. To rotate an object freely 1 Click the object to rotate. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Skew Tool. 4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that
231
Chapter
33 Editing 3D Objects
2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.
Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements. Accessing the elevation slider 1 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed. 2 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool again to hide the Elevation Slider. Note: To specify an exact elevation where you want your object drawn, be sure the Elevation Slider is open and set to that height. All subsequent shapes will be set to that elevation. To use the elevation slider 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to elevate. 5 Release the mouse to stop rotating the object. To rotate an object a specified amount 1 Click the object to rotate. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to rotate. 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed. To specify an exact elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 3 Click the Elevation Slider, at the left side of your window, and move the elevation control up or down until the object is in the correct position.
2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to rotate. 3 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. 4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want to rotate.
4 You can rotate a selection using Degrees or Radians. Click the radio button corresponding to the system you want to use. 5 Type the angle you want to rotate the selection in the Angle text box and click OK. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to rotate. Selection handles appear around the object. 232 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK. To set the working elevation 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Working Elevation from the popup menu that is displayed.
Specifying Object Size
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK. To set the elevation of a group of objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate. 3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 3 Select the absolute size or percent to be scaled and type the necessary values. 4 Click from which part of the object you want to resize. 5 Click OK. The object is resized to the exact measurements or percentage you specified.
4 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches separated with a hyphen. Click OK. Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the objects were originally located at various elevations.
Grouping Objects
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing. To group objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click each object that you want to be included in the group. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool; or on the Edit menu, click Group; or right-click and click Group on the pop-up menu that is displayed. To ungroup objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the group you want to ungroup. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Ungroup Tool or on the Edit menu, click Ungroup.
Specifying Object Size

With the object size option you can specify exact measurements for each object, either as a percentage of the original size or by specifying dimensions in inches. This is very useful, especially when you know how large or small an object must be to fit a specific space in your home. To change an objects size 1 Click to select the object. 2 On the Options menu, click Object Size or double-click the object you want to resize. The Object Size dialog box is displayed.
Locking Objects in Place

Many times you will want to lock an object in place after it is positioned. This avoids accidentally moving the object. To lock an object 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the object you want to lock. 3 (optional) Hold down SHIFT and click each object that you want to lock.
233
Chapter
To define a new layer 1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed, or click the Layers tab. 2 Click New. The New Layer Name dialog box is displayed.
4 On the Control toolbar, click the Lock Tool; or on the Edit menu, click Lock; or right-click and click Lock on the pop-up menu that is displayed. To unlock objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the objects you want to unlock. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Unlock Tool or on the Edit menu, click Unlock.
Hiding Detection
When you are working in layers, it will be helpful to make some objects unable to be selected, which makes it easier to select objects underneath. The Hide Detection feature makes this a simple process. To the hide detection of an object 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click to select the object you want to lock. 3 (optional) Press SHIFT and click each object that you want to lock. 4 On the Control toolbar, click the Hide Detection Tool, or press CTRL+J. (alternate) On the Edit menu, click Hide Detection. To detect objects 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the object you want to detect. 3 On the Control toolbar click the Detect Tool, or press CTRL+K. (alternate) On the Edit menu, click Detect All. 5 Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you need. When you are finished creating layers, click OK. To move a part of the drawing to a new layer
3 Type the new layers name in the Layer Name text box. 4 Click OK.
Right-click the part of the drawing you want to move to another layer, then click Move to Layer on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which Layer. The selection is moved to the new layer.
Working in Layers
Using the Layer option, you can store different information on different layers of your drawing. The Active Layers name is always displayed on the Design toolbar. Many of the functions are available through the Layer Properties dialog box. From the Layer Properties menu, you can choose to show or hide certain layers, which makes viewing and working on individual layers easy and uncluttered. To make complex objects more manageable, break them into logical layers. If you are drawing a chair, for example, you may want a separate layer for the back, the legs, the cushion, and so on. To hide a layer 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click to select the layer you want to hide, then click the Hide button.
(alternate) On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click the layer you want to hide. If you select Hide All, only the active layer will remain visible. Note: The active layer cannot be hidden. To hide all layers 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click the Hide All Layers button. (alternate) On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click Hide All Layers. Note: The active layer cannot be hidden. To show all layers 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click the Show All Layers button. (alternate) On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click Show All Layers. To rename a layer 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click to select the layer you want to rename. 3 Click the Rename button. The dialog box is displayed. 4 Type the layers new name in the Layer Name text box and click OK. OR 1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed.
3 Type the layers new name in the Rename Layer dialog box. 4 Click OK. 5 Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you want to rename. When you are finished, click OK. To remove a layer 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click to select the layer you want to delete. 3 Click the Remove button. OR 1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to select the layer you want to delete. 3 Click Remove. A warning will be displayed letting you know that all objects on that layer will also be deleted. Click OK to continue. 4 Click OK. All objects on that layer are deleted. To change your active layer 1 Click the Layers tab. 2 Click the Active Layer drop-down menu and click the layer you want to become your Active Layer. (alternate) On the Design menu, click Active Layer, then click the layer you want to become your Active Layer.

With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left, and right selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as small as one inch may be defined. To change the nudge distance 1 On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Spacing Tool or, on the Design menu, click Grid Spacing. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to select the layer you want to rename, then click Rename. The Rename dialog box is displayed.
235
Chapter
3 On the Tool Options, type the distance you want the object moved in the corresponding text boxes. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Selecting Points within an Object

The Select In Polygon Tool is a versatile tool which allows you to select objects or points that lie within another object. This tool allows you to click points to define a selection area. To select points within an object 1 Click the Select In Polygon Tool. 2 Click and drag to define the selection area, around the points or objects you want selected. 3 Once youve finished the selection area, right-click to select each point or object inside the area. To align object faces 1 Select the objects you want to align. 2 On the Edit menu, choose Align Objects and choose the face by which you want the selections aligned. The objects are aligned based on the component you selected. Align Object Top
2 There are three pre-set nudge distances. Click the radio button corresponding to the nudge distance you want. 3 (optional) Type a custom distance in one of the text fields, then click the radio button. 4 Click OK. To move an object by nudging 1 Click the object you want to move. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Moving an Object
You can move an object easily, using the click and drag method or by specifying coordinates. To move by dragging 1 Click the object you want to move. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to move the object. 3 Click and drag the object to where you want it displayed. 4 Release to place. To move by specifying the distance 1 Click the object you want to move. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to move the object.
Align Object Bottom
Align Object Vertical Center
Using Flip
Using Flip
The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Depending on which grid is active, flipping an object varies. To flip an object horizontally 1 Click the object you want to flip. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal Tool, or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Horizontal. 4 Move the object into position.
To flip an object vertically 1 Click the object you want to flip. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool, or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Vertical.
To mirror an object vertically 1 Click the object you want to mirror. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical Tool, or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Vertical.
Using Mirror
Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects that face one another. Depending on which grid is active, mirroring an object varies. To mirror an object horizontally 1 Click the object you want to mirror. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal Tool, or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Horizontal. 4 Move the object into position.
237
Chapter
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, double-click the Duplicate Tool, or on the Edit menu, click Duplicate, Duplicate Properties. The Duplicate Properties dialog box is displayed.
Duplicating Objects
Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the duplicate properties dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates. To create a duplicate 1 Click the object you want to duplicate. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Tool, or press CTRL+D. (alternate) On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object.
4 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates. Note: These variables control the distance apart the duplicates are placed. 5 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset(s) you defined.
To create a series of duplicate objects 1 Click the object you want to duplicate. Note: Above, the Horizontal Offset is 0, the Vertical Offset is -1'-0", and the Repetitions value is 3.
Chapter 34
Controlling Views
You can control the way you see your design in 3D Custom Workshop. These views can make editing much easier or can simply make it clearer to view specific areas of your drawing.
To view in orthographic
In this chapter you will learn to use ClearView, perspective, orthographic, textured, and Wireframe views. You will also learn how to zoom in on a specific area and how to set the camera angle.
Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Orthographic, or on the View menu, click View in Orthographic.
Using Perspective or Orthographic Views

Perspective view is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. Perspective views give more information about depth and are often easier to view because they are similar to a real world view. Orthographic viewpoints make it much easier to compare, for example, two parts of the object, as there is no question of how the viewpoint may affect the perception of distance. To view in perspective
Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Perspective, or on the View menu, click View in Perspective.
Using Different Views

Textured view gives a more realistic appearance and is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. In Wireframe view each individual line or arc is visible and able to be changed; detailed editing of the object may be easier in Wireframe view. While viewing in Wireframe, you can control the appearance of the point handles, making them large, small, or turning them off completely. While in ClearView, you can view your design in an opaque state. 3D Custom Workshops technology includes antialiased, photo-realism. You can even create glass-topped tables by setting the Translucency of an object.
Note: Parts of the drawing that are nearest to you will appear larger than those further away.
239
Chapter
34 Controlling Views
To view Wireframe mode
Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wireframe.
To view using ClearView
On the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then ClearView.
To control the appearance of point handles 1 Click to select the object. 2 Click the Point Edit button to toggle to Points. The object is displayed in Wireframe, and with point handles. 3 On the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
To render using 3D final quality
On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality.
To set 3D render quality
On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Ultra-High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.
4 Under Point Handles, click the radio button corresponding to the option you want: Off, Small, or Large. 5 Click OK. To view shaded mode
Click the Rendering Style button, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
To set translucency 1 Click the object, or part of an object, you want to alter. Selection handles are displayed around the object.
Setting your Wireframe as your Default View
2 Click on the design window. 3 Hold the mouse button down. 4 Move the pointer up to zoom in and move the pointer down to zoom out. 5 Release the mouse button. To set a specific zoom percentage 2 On the Properties sheet, click the Translucency button. The Object Translucency control box is displayed. 1 Double-click the Zoom Tool, or on the View menu, click Set Zoom. The Set Zoom dialog box is displayed.
3 Move the slider to the percent of translucency. Click OK.
2 Type a zoom percentage into the dialog box. 3 Click OK. To pan across the drawing 1 Click the Pan Tool. 2 Click on the design window. 3 Hold the mouse button down. 4 Drag the object to the center of the window. (alternate) Press and hold your mouse wheel, or center mouse button, then drag your mouse to pan.
Setting your Wireframe as your Default View

By default, objects are displayed in Shaded View. To speed up rendering times, you can set the default view so objects are displayed, first, in Wireframe. To set Wireframe as your default view 1 On the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to check the Start in Wireframe Mode checkbox. 3 Click OK.
To adjust the lighting intensity 1 On the View Menu, click 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.
2 Increase or decrease the overall lighting by clicking and dragging the slider. 3 Click OK.
Using Zoom
At some point while illustrating your object, you may want a close-up view of a specific area. By using the zoom and pan tools in concert with the set zoom feature, you will be able to view any area of your drawing with pinpoint accuracy. With the Pan Tool, you can move the window to view a different area of the drawing without changing the magnification. To zoom in or out of your drawing 1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Zoom Tool.
Setting the Camera Angle

With the 3D Camera Angle options you can view your design from six preset vantage points. They are particularly useful when you need to quickly view a specific area of your design or when you want to line up multiple objects. To view from 3D top view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Top.
241
Chapter
To view from 3D bottom view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Bottom.
To view from 3D front view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Front.
To view from 3D back view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Back. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Wireframe color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects in Wireframe, they are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of point handles 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Point Handles color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Point Handles color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using Point Selection, points are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix.
To view from 3D left view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Left.
To view from 3D right view
On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Right.
To return to the default view
On the View menu, click Reset View.

Using the Custom Options dialog box, you can control default colors of specific aspects of 3D Custom Workshop, such as Wireframe, point handles, grid color, new objects, and more. To change the appearance of Wireframe 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Background color. 5 Click OK. The background is now displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the grid color 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
Using Fly-Around
2 Click the Grid Color color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the Grid Color color. 5 Click OK. The grid is now displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance new objects 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the New Object color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the New Object color. 5 Click OK. New objects are displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of the ClearView foreground 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Foreground color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Foreground color. 5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the foreground is displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of ClearView background 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the ClearView Background color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the ClearView Background color.
5 Click OK. When you view objects using ClearView, the background is displayed in the color you chose. To change the appearance of Profile 3D objects 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Click the Profile 3D Objects color. The Colors dialog box is displayed. 3 Click a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix. 4 Click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the profile color. 5 Click OK. When you view profile 3D objects, the profile is displayed in the color you chose. To reset default colors 1 Click the Custom Options button, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Under Colors, click the Reset To Default button. 3 Click OK.
Using Fly-Around
In addition to the six preset viewing angles, you can view your design from any other angle using the Fly-Around Tool. The Fly-Around Tool lets you rotate around a point of origin that can be defined with a couple clicks. You can easily rotate around the center of any object, again with just a click or two! To use the Fly-Around Tool 1 On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Fly-Around button. 2 Hold the mouse button down and move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the window and watch the view move dynamically. (alternate) Press and hold the Spacebar, then click and drag to navigate around the drawing. To set the rotation elevation 1 On the View menu, click Set Rotation Elevation. The Set Rotation Elevation dialog box is displayed.
243
Chapter
Curve Tension set at 10:
2 Type the Rotation Elevation you want, in the text box, and click OK. To hide the point of rotation origin
On the Options menu, click to uncheck Rotation Origin Visible. (alternate) ) Right-click on the design window, then click to uncheck Rotation Origin Visible.

To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve. To change curve tension 1 Click an object to select it. 2 On the Properties sheet, click Adjust Curve. The Curve Tension dialog box is displayed. To control curve-drawing smoothness 1 Click the Custom Options Tool, or on the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 3 Type the amount of tension that you want. 4 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied. Examples: Default Curve Tension (5): 2 Click and drag the 2D Curve-Drawing Smoothness slider to decrease or increase the drawing smoothness. 3 Click OK. Note: When changed, the drawing smoothness affects all curves in the drawing. Curve Tension set at 20:
Using Nudge and the Grid

Once youve placed an object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see Nudge, which begins on page 54. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 69. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects, snapping objects to the grid, and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is
turned on. For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 69.
2 Click to deselect the Grid Visible checkbox. 3 Click OK. To toggle the grid constrain 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 2 Click to deselect the Constrain objects to the drawing grid boundaries checkbox. 3 Click OK. To change the grid size 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 2 Type Width, Height, and Depth measurements in the corresponding text fields, then click OK.

By default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square on the floor plan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized Grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the components simple. To keep things from slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain feature. To change grid settings 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 2 (optional) On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Properties button. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed. 3 (optional) Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements in the Gridlines section. 4 (optional) Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements for the Snap Grid. 5 Click OK.
Rotating an Object
With the Rotate Tool you can easily spin an object around any point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn. To rotate an object freely To turn off the snap grid
1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object.
On the Grid Toolbar, click the Snap Grid On/ Off Toggle or on the Design menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid.
To hide the grid from view 1 On the Design menu, click Grid Properties. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.
245
Chapter
5 Release the mouse to stop rotating the object. To rotate an object a specified amount 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to rotate. 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.
2 On the Design menu, click the drawing grid along which you want to rotate. 3 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. 4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want to rotate. 4 You can rotate a selection using Degrees or Radians. Click the radio button corresponding to the system you want to use. 5 Type the angle you want to rotate the selection in the Angle text box and click OK. To rotate an object in 1-degree increments 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object. 2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.
Glossary
Numerics
3D cutaway slider
A feature of 3D View that allows you to peel away layers of your design. Using the icon above the slider, you can control the direction from which the cutaway originates. Also called Dollhouse View.
AutoClick Placement
A feature of 3D View that allows you to quickly add selected objects, plants, trim, colors, and materials to your design with one click.
B
baluster
One of a series of vertical supports between beams for a handrail.
3D fly around view

A feature of 3D View that allows you to move around and view your entire design from above. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D walk through, controlled walk-through view, controlled fly-around view.
beam
A structural element that helps support a building or heavy load and take the weight off the walls or roof above. TurboFloorPlan allows you to create beams made of steel, wood, or a custom material.
3D View
3D View is a tool that allows you to move around and view your design in photo-realistic 3D. There are three window size options for viewing in 3D View: 3D Quarter View, Split Plan, and 3D Full View. Using 3D View you can add colors and materials to the objects and entities in your design, including walls, furniture, roofs, walkways, and much, much more. See also 3D fly around, 3D walk through, accessory, controlled fly around, controlled walk through, material.
building pad
An area of firm, level ground upon which a buildings foundation is made.
C
cased opening
A door-shaped opening in a wall, which is framed like a doorway.
3D walk through
A feature of 3D View that allows you to move around and view your design as if you were walking through it. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D fly around view, controlled walk-through view, controlled fly-around view.
centerpoint
A centerpoint is a point within a circle, from which the radius and equidistance can be determined. See also circle, curve.
circle
A geometric entity defined by a centerpoint and a radius. TurboFloorPlan allows you to convert circles to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. A circle differs from a curve in that a circles points are equidistant from the centerpoint. See also curve, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon.
A
accessory
Decorative items such as drapes, shutters, or wall art that you can place in 3D View. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls.
circular arc
An entity consisting of a segment between two points on a circle. Circular arcs can be converted into interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and driveways, as well as retaining walls and many more objects. See also arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve.
annotation
A drawing component that gives information about the drawing. Examples of annotations include dimensions, text, and leaders.
arc
An entity consisting of two points connected by a gradually curved segment. Arcs can be used to create interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and driveways as well as retaining walls. See also circular arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve.
ClearView
A feature of 3D View that allows you to display your project in a semi-transparent mode. ClearView allows you to see nearby surfaces, even while items or surfaces behind them are also visible.
247
Glossary
clipboard
A temporary storage area for data you have cut or copied. A clipboard can only hold one item at a time. See also paste, edit menu.
dormer
A small window set vertically in a gable, that projects from an angled roof. See also gable roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
codec
An acronym for Compression/Decompression, is a program that analyzes large files and programs for repetition and redundancies. When found, they are replaced with a formula to reduce or compress the number of bytes the file or program consumes when stored. When the file or program is open or recalled, the formula activates or decompresses the information so it appears as it was originally. See also, animator.
color ramp
A color selection method in which you choose a color from a spectrum organized by shade and hue, then use the color library to find the correct shade. Colors are displayed from light to dark.
drag-and-drop
Drag-and-drop is a manual action performed using your mouse, to move an object or entity from one location to another. You select the object or entity, press and hold your left mouse button, then drag your mouse to the desired location and release the mouse button to drop the object.
compass
A feature that allows you to orient your design to north. You can establish the true north setting for your design, which will affect the position of the sun and the shadows, as well as determine the best location for a deck, pool, or large windows. See also true north.
drawing scale
The ratio between the size of your drawing screen and the realworld object you are drawing. Higher values on the screen units side make it easier to draw small details. Higher values on the world units side make it easier to draw large details. Also called plan scale.
content
Realistic 3D features such as drapes, wainscoting, furniture, paint, and other real-world items that can be viewed in your 3D View window.
curve
A geometric entity consisting of a smoothly sloping segment. TurboFloorPlan allows you to create curves and convert them to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also circle, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon.
DWG
The binary file format used by AutoCAD.
DXF
An ASCII- or binary-based file format developed by Autodesk, Inc. and widely supported by CAD programs.
curve tension
The amount of slope in a curved segment. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50, with 1 equaling only a slightly curved segment, and 50 equaling a greatly-exaggerated curve.
E
elevation
A measurement that describes an object or entitys distance above or below the working level. Topographic elevation refers to an object or entitys distance above or below sea level. TurboFloorPlan allows you to control the elevation of everything, from your foundation to a window or light switch.
D
Decorator Palette
A 3D View feature that allows you to organize and store colors and materials for your 3D design.
diameter
A geometric measurement that describes the distance, through the center, between points on a circle. See also circle.
ellipse
See oval.
entity
2D items such as lines, arcs, and circles that have not been assigned properties and do not display in 3D. See also object.
dimension
An annotation that describes the length, width, or height of an object or entity.
extrude
To convert a two-dimensional object into a three-dimensional object by giving the object depth. Extrude is available in 3D Custom Workshop.
dollhouse view
See 3D cutaway slider.
door header
See header.
F
fill
TurboFloorPlan defines the term fill in two separate contexts. When drawing geometric entities, fill refers a solid color or hatch pattern that is displayed inside of a closed entity, such as a rectangle or circle. When drawing topography objects, fill is a man-made deposit of natural soils or rock products and waste materials used to raise an area of land or to provide a bed for plants or a pool.
grid
A visual drawing aid consisting of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines. In 2D plan view, grids are always oriented on the ground. 3D grids allow you to draw on the front or sides (lateral) of an object. See also Snap to Grid.
H
header
A structural element above a door or window that transfers stress to the load-bearing studs on either side of the opening.
flip
An editing feature that allows you to select an object and reverse it horizontally or vertically.
hip roof
A roof defined by four evenly sloped planes meeting at a ridge peak. A hip roof is supported by hip rafters at each of the four corners. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, roof pitch.
floor cutout
An opening in the floor used to allow stair access or to create a loft.
fly around
See 3D fly around.
hvac
An acronym for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning. A construction term that refers to objects associated with temperature control and air flow throughout a building, such as air ducts, air conditioners, furnaces, and so on.
foundation
An architectural structure that transmits loads from a building to the underlying ground. It supports the weight of the building and provides stability.
J
join
An editing procedure in which two arcs, lines, or polylines, whose endpoints are nearby, are converted into a single entity. See join sensitivity.
framing beam
See beam.
free rotate
An editing feature that allows you to rotate an object or entity, by clicking and dragging.
join sensitivity
A setting that determines the acceptable distance between the endpoints of two entities, before they can be joined.
G
gable roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of equal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two equally-sized triangular wall extensions, known as gables. See also dormer, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
joist
A structural element that runs horizontally from wall to wall in support of ceiling or floor. A joist is typically supported by a beam. See beam, rafter.
L
line
A geometric entity consisting of two points, connected by a straight segment. TurboFloorPlan lets you use lines to define property boundaries, animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines with additional properties, such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, ovals, polygons, polylines, rectangles, squares.
gambrel roof
A roof defined by four pitches, two on each side. The bottom slopes of each side are more steep than the top slopes. Gambrel roofs are common on barns. See also dormer, gable roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
M
material
A material is a textured or decorated object that affects another object or entitys appearance. Brick, stone, carpet, fabric, wood, and grass are all examples of materials TurboFloorPlan offers to enhance and customize your design. See also color tab, paint tab.
mirror
An editing feature that allows you to select an object and place a horizontally or vertically reversed copy of it.
249
Glossary
multigon
A geometric entity consisting of multiple points, connected by straight line segments. TurboFloorPlan allows you to convert multigons to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. Also called a polygon. See also arc, circle, oval, polylines, rectangle, square, curve, detail tab.
P
palette
A collection of colors and materials you choose and organize, based on your design needs. Creating a palette is very helpful when working with and applying a variety of colors and materials throughout your design, because you can organize the contents into groups and name each group, based on where it belongs in your design. See also 3D View.
N
notation
An annotation in the form of text, that can be used as a label, reminder, or description. You may include any type of information you want for yourself or anyone viewing your design.
pan tool
A viewing tool that lets you scroll, horizontally or vertically, over your design. See also zoom tool.
plan view
A 2D representation of a design in which the drawing is viewed from above.
nudge
An editing feature that allows you to use the arrow keys to move a selection one grid unit to the left, right, top, or bottom. When Snap to Grid is turned off, Nudge moves the object or feature one pixel at a time, instead of one grid unit. See also grid, Snap to Grid.
plan scale
See drawing scale.
PlantFinder
A sorting feature that allows you to display only plants that meet your criteria. For instance, you can use the PlantFinder to narrow the offerings to only those plants that require only minimal sunlight.
O
object
A representation of a real-world item such as a door, window, furniture, or plant. An object may be comprised of entities, such as lines, circles, and polylines in 2D, but in 3D View, the object will be displayed as a realistic item. See also entity.
polygon
See multigon.
PowerTool
An add-on application that allows you to enhance your project.
object selection mode

An editing feature that allows you to control the size and location of an entire object. Using object selection mode, you can modify the size and location, without affecting the proportion. See also point selection mode.
proxy settings
A virtual buffer between your computer and the information you are accessing on the Internet. Proxy settings can be customized to restrict your computer from certain information.
offset dimension
An annotation consisting of a length dimension that appears at a specific distance from the object or entity it is measuring.
R
rafter
A structural element that extends from the top of a wall to the ridge peak and supports a roof.
opacity
A measure of an objects transparency. The more opaque an object is, the less transparent it is. See also translucent, transparent.
rectangle
A geometric entity consisting of four points, connected by four straight line segments. TurboFloorPlan allows you to convert rectangles to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, oval, multigon, polyline, multigon, square, curve, detail tab.
organizer
A file management feature that allows you to create custom categories to sort and store objects, templates, and trim. This is useful when placing many different types of objects or trim throughout your design and while working with an assortment of templates.
oval
A geometric entity consisting of a closed curve that resembles a flattened circle. TurboFloorPlan lets you use ovals to define property boundaries, animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines with additional properties, such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, multigons, polylines, rectangles, squares.
redo
To reverse the effects of an undo command. See also undo.
reference grid
See grid.
rim joist
A structural element that ties the ends of floor trusses together. See also framing beam, beam.
roof pitch
The angle of a roof commonly expressed as a ratio of vertical rise to horizontal run. A pitch of 8:12 means that the roof rises 8 for 12 of horizontal run.
room template
A pre-drawn design, for a kitchen, bath, or other room, that you can place in your drawing, then customize to fit your own design.
transparent
A characteristic of a material or object that describes your ability to see through it. See also translucent, opacity.
S
saltbox roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of unequal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two irregularly-sized triangular wall extensions. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
true north
A navigational term referring to the direction of the North Pole relative to the navigators position. See also compass.
truss
A structural element that helps support a roof, top floor, or beam. A truss is designed in a triangular shape and is stronger than a beam. See also, beam, joist.
U
undo
To reverse the effects of the most recent draw or edit operation. TurboFloorPlan allows you to undo up to 50 operations. See also undo parameters.
undo parameters
A setting that allows you to determine the number of operations you can undo. TurboFloorPlan allows you to undo up to 50 operations; however, higher values may impact performance.
scale
See drawing scale.
unit of measurement
The notation system used to enter and display distances, angles, and areas. TurboFloorPlan allows you to select either English, to display measurements using feet and inches, or Metric, to display measurements using meters.
Snap to Grid
An editing feature that allows you to place items at regular points in your drawing. When Snap to Grid is turned on, items that are placed in the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on.
URL
An acronym for Uniform Resource Locator, which specifies a websites unique address. Typically, URLs are prefaced by http:/ /www.
square
A rectangle in which all four sides are of equal length. TurboFloorPlan allows you to convert squares to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, curve, detail tab, oval, multigon, polyline, rectangle.
USDA zone maps

A method for determining hardiness zones. Hardiness zones are determined based on average temperature and amount of sunlight.
stud
A structural element that runs vertically in support of the walls. Most building codes require studs to be placed every 16", to provide adequate support. See also framing beam, joists.
symbol
2D representations of 3D objects such as furniture, doors, or electrical outlets.
T
template
See room template.
V
virtual ruler
A visual drawing aid that allows you to determine lengths, in feet and inches. The virtual ruler can be positioned in any way and extended to reach from one end of a design to the other.
texture
A material surface, such as wood or brick, applied to a 3D wall or object. See also material.
VRML
Virtual Reality Modeling Language, a standard file format for representing 3D objects on the World Wide Web.
translucent
A characteristic of a material or object that describes lights ability to pass through it. Translucency differs from transparency in that a transparent object, such as clear glass, can be seen through, while a translucent object, such as frosted glass, only allows light to pass through. See also transparent, opacity.
W
wainscotting
A decorative interior wall surface, typically made of wood, that contrasts with the wall surface above it.
251
Glossary
walk-through
See 3D walk through.
window grill
The vertical and horizontal strips of wood in a window that separate the panes of glass. TurboFloorPlan allows you to customize your window grill style, so your window has one large piece of glass, or multiple panes.
window header
See header.
window molding
The wood casing around the outside of a window opening.
working elevation
See elevation.
working floor
A working floor is a term that describes which level of your design you are currently working on.
Z
zone map
See USDA zone map.
zoom factor
A setting that allows you to control how much magnification is applied each time you click the zoom tool.
zoom tool
A viewing tool that allows you to magnify your drawing.
Index
Numerics
2D arranging windows 75 2D objects, converting (3D Custom Workshop) 206 2D panning the view 18 2D view 17 in 3D Custom Workshop 196 2D view, resetting 18 2D viewing in 3D 22 2D zooming 17 3D adding shadows 81 3D animation 81 3D arranging windows 75 3D Custom Workshop AutoClick Placement 213, 228 Decorator Palette 229 3D Custom Workshop floor grid 194 3D Custom Workshop front grid 194 3D Custom Workshop side grid 194 3D cutaway slider 21 3D Full View 90 3D lighting intensity in 3D Custom Workshop 241 3D selection tool 22 3D View 20 adding colors to palette 83 adding materials to palette 83 adding textures to palette 83 collapsing palette groups 83 deleting saved views 85 expanding palette groups 83 exporting palettes 84 importing palettes 84 managing palettes 84 opening a window 75 organizing palettes 84 organizing saved views 85 palette 83 palette groups 83 QuickStart 96 rename saved views 85 renaming palette groups 83 saving palettes 84 show/hide ceiling (QuickStart) 96 3D View, customizing 84 3D View, printing 52 3D view, saving 85 3D viewing speed 77 3D walk through 76 3-point freehand roof tool 133 4-point freehand roof tool 133
A
AC 140 ac units, rotating 141 access QuickPalette 33 accessories 111 add cabinet hardware 116 add door hardware 109 add outdoor cabinet hardware 153 add point 165 adding air conditioners 140
color (Fence Designer) 176 color ramp(Fence Designer) 176 custom color (Fence Designer) 176 custom material (Fence Designer) 176 fences (Fence Designer) 171 gates (Fence Designer) 171 heat pumps 140 heating 140 lighting 120 material (Fence Designer) 176 objects to library (3D Custom Workshop) 192 railings 113 roofing 131 adding an upper floor 111 addition place 106 roofing settings 107 wall settings 106 window and door settings 107 aerial view, elevation 77 age, customizing plant 27, 63 air conditioner 140 air ducts, placing 139 align text 62 alignment options 71 alter roof size 133 alter roof slope 134 angled text 63 animations 81 annotations 62 apply color 30 apply material 31 applying materials (3D Custom Workshop) 211 Applying Paint and Color (3D Custom Workshop) 212, 225 arc 2D circular (3D Custom Workshop) 202 2D circular closed (3D Custom Workshop) 201 2D closed (3D Custom Workshop) 200 2D open (3D Custom Workshop) 202 circular (3D Custom Workshop) 220 drawing 162 arc, drawing in Fence Designer 174 arc, open (3D Custom Workshop) 219 auto activate tool options 8 auto flooring 102 auto roof generation, turn off 131 AutoClick Placement (3D Custom Workshop) 213, 228 auto-floor, on and off 103 automatic dimensioning, on and off 102 automatic dimensioning, turning off 73 automatic roofing (QuickStart) 96 autosnap options 70
B
back view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 background color (3D Custom Workshop) 191 baluster (deck), changing spacing 147 baluster spacing 147 base trim 29 baseboard heaters 141 basic terminology 9 bathroom (QuickStart) 95
253
Index
bathtubs, placing 128 battery power supply,uninterruptible power supply 123 bay wall 106 beam size, specifying (framing) 168 beam type customizing (framing) 168 specifying (framing) 168 beams dimensioning 99 length 99 stiffener 99 bedroom (QuickStart) 95 blinds 111 bottom view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 break a wall 107 bring to front 165 in Fence Designer 176 Build Green 19 building green 19
C
cabinet hardware, add or remove 116 cable jack 122 calculating construction costs 186 calculating square footage 62 camera (PhotoView) 181 camera angle 77 in 3D Custom Workshop 241 cased opening 39 ceiling and floor outlets, placing 119 ceiling fan 122 ceiling height 106 ceiling height, setting 60 ceiling/floor options 103 center text 62 chain link fence 156 chain linked fence properties in Fence Designer 172 chain-linked fence (Fence Designer) 171 chamfer 165 change deck height 146 door type 108 exterior wall length 101 font of annotations 62 roof pitch 133 roof slope 134 style of line 164 thickness of line 164 width, pathway 154 circles, drawing 161 in Fence Designer 174 circular arc (3D Custom Workshop) 220 circular arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 202 circular arc, drawing 163 in Fence Designer 174 circular closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 218 circular closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 201 clear 54 ClearView 78 in 3D Custom Workshop 239 clipboard 54 closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 217 closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 200 closet (QuickStart) 95 closing files 46 color ramp 30 color, adding (Fence Designer) 176 color, applying 30 color, assign a new 19 color, find applied 31 color, interior fill 74 color, plan layer 18, 74 color, printing plan in 51 colors, controlling (3D Custom Workshop) 210, 242 colors, custom 31
colors, foreground and background (3D Custom Workshop) 191 colors, reset all 19, 74 colors, search (3D Custom Workshop) 229 column material (framing) 169 material, customizing (framing) 169 size, specifying (framing) 169 connector switches 120 construction costs, calculating (Estimator) 186 construction materials (RealModel) 86 content folder 182 contents, package 3 context-sensitive help 10, 91 convert, degrees to radians (3D Custom Workshop) 207 copy 54 copying objects between floors 57 crown molding 29 crown trim, remove 29 cues, graphic 9 cursor dimension, on and off 73 curtains 111 curve (3D Custom Workshop) 221 curve a pathway 154 curve tension 164 in 3D Custom Workshop 205 curve, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 203 curved deck railing 149 deck staircase 112 railing 114 staircase 148 curved edging 155 curved wall 106 curves, drawing 163 in Fence Designer 175 custom color 31 custom color palette 30 custom color, adding (Fence Designer) 176 customize 3D view 84 customizing colors (Estimator) 186 customizing deck railing 149 customizing deck staircases 148 customizing railing 114 cut 54 cutaway slider 21
D
deactivate undo 53 deck cut-out 149 deck height, change 146 deck plan tab 145 deck properties 169 deck reflectivity 148 decks adding 145 handrails 147 decorator palette 83 decorator palette (3D Custom Workshop) 229 decorator palettes delete 84 prioritize 84 rename 84 default ceiling height 60 default colors and materials 33 default design materials 32 delete point 165 detail plan tab 161 detect all (3D Custom Workshop) 234 diameter dimension 72 digital picture, importing (PhotoView) 181 dimensions adding between walls 72 change endpoint 73 changing location 103 from wall to center 102 hiding 73, 102
dimensions, display (Fence Designer) 173 dimming lights 121 dining room (QuickStart) 95 display settings 13 dollhouse view 21 door 39 door callouts, on and off 102 door dimensions, hiding 73, 102 door hardware, add or remove 109 door settings 108 doors 108 resizing 108 show features in 3D 85 dormer 134 double doors 109 drag-and-drop, objects 25 drains, floor 128 drapes 111 drawing arcs 162 arcs (Fence Designer) 174 circles 161 circles (Fence Designer) 174 circular arcs 163 circular arcs (Fence Designer) 174 curves 163 curves (Fence Designer) 175 lines 162 lines (Fence Designer) 174 multigons 163 multigons (Fence Designer) 175 ovals 161 ovals (Fence Designer) 174 polygons 162 polygons (Fence Designer) 175 rectangles 161 rectangles (Fence Designer) 174 squares 161 squares (Fence Designer) 174 drawing (3D Custom Workshop) 215 drawing from center (3D Custom Workshop) 206, 223 drawing from corner (3D Custom Workshop) 209, 223 drawing in 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 199 drawing scale, setting 14, 60 driveway 154 ducts, placing 139 duplicate properties (3D Custom Workshop) 238 duplicating in 3D Custom Workshop 238
in Fence Designer 174 email plans 50 enclosing, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 206 Estimator 185 excavate topography 159 existing files, opening 45 exiting 46 export a pricelist (Estimator) 187 extruding, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 206 eyeglasses 79
F
family room (QuickStart) 95 fan, ceiling 122 features, moving between plans 58 Fence Designer 171 fence properties chain linked (Fence Designer) 172 ornamental iron (Fence Designer) 172 picket (Fence Designer) 172 privacy (Fence Designer) 173 rail (Fence Designer) 173 fence style (Fence Designer) 171 fences adding (Fence Designer) 171 change style 157 drawing 156 resizing (Fence Designer) 176 file format (PhotoView) 181 files closing 46 new 45 opening 45 printing 51 saving 47 fill 154 description 155 reshaping 151 fillet 165 fills 164 filter selections 71 find applied 31 find applied tool 23 flat roof 134 flip in 3D Custom Workshop 237 PhotoView image 183 flip room (Room Wizard) 143 flip, entire plan 55 flood lights, adding 122 floor cutout adding 114 drawing 114 floor drains 128 floor grid (3D Custom Workshop) 194 floor options 103 floor plan tab 101 Floor Plan Trace 65 flooring auto-floor off 103 auto-floor on 103 description 114 drawing 114 joists 167 reshaping 114 floors, adding 111 flowers 26 flush right text 62 fly around center of reference 76 in 3D Custom Workshop 243 fly around speed 77 follow topography 57 font 63
E
edging 155 even heights 156 flip direction 155 reshape 155 style 155 vary heights 155 edit patio 152 edit property line 151 edit text 63 edit toolbar 7 editing a drawing 53 editing objects 35 editing, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 231 electrical outlet 119 electrical plan tab 119 elevate to an existing surface 57 elevate window 110 elevating objects 56 elevating, PhotoView image 183 Elevation Bar 56 Elevation Editor 39 Elevation View 90 elevation, aerial 77 ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 161
255
Index
foreground and background colors (3D Custom Workshop) 191 forum 11 foundation piers 99 foundation slope, changing 100 four-point freehand roof tool 133 framing beam 167 framing material 167 framing, render in 78 free rotate 55 French doors 109 front grid (3D Custom Workshop) 194 front view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 furniture 25
G
gable roof 131 gambrel roof 135 gang switch 120 garage (QuickStart) 95 gas bib 127 gates 156 adding (Fence Designer) 171 resizing (Fence Designer) 176 glow 121 going green 19 green tips 19 grid 69 using (3D Custom Workshop) 245 grid settings in 3D Custom Workshop 195 grid spacing 69 in 3D Custom Workshop 195, 245 in Fence Designer 178 grid style 69 in Fence Designer 178 grid, constrain toggle (3D Custom Workshop) 195, 245 grid, displaying 70 in Fence Designer 178 grill settings, window 110 ground fill region 151 grouped apply (3D Custom Workshop) 227 grouping objects (3D Custom Workshop) 233 growing, plants 29 guide, about this 9
import 3DS file (3D Custom Workshop) 191 importing 47 importing (Floor Plan Trace) 64 importing DXF 161 importing image (Fence Designer) 177 importing image (PhotoView) 181 importing objects 26 insert PhotoView image 181 installation 3 installing, troubleshooting 4 insulation, specifying 167 intensity, lighting in 3D Custom Workshop 241 inverse fillet 165 irregular walls 105
J
jacks, phone and cable 122 joists angle, specifying 168 material, specifying 168 size, specifying 168 spacing, specifying 168
K
kitchen (QuickStart) 95
L
label leader dimension 72 landing, stairway 113 landscape plan tab 151 Landscape Quote 51 landscape, designing 151 laser alignment 71 launch Elevation Editor 39 Estimator 185 Floor Plan Trace 64 laundry room (QuickStart) 95 layer, viewing plan 18, 68 layers hiding (3D Custom Workshop) 234 renaming (3D Custom Workshop) 235 show all (3D Custom Workshop) 235 working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 234 working with (3D Custom Workshop) 234 layers, viewing 17, 68 leader dimension 72 leader type 72 left view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 length dimension 72 library organizer 36 library paneling 29 library paneling, remove 29 light switch 119 lighting adding interior 120 adjusting ambient light(outdoor) 80 adjusting intensity (3D Custom Workshop) 241 adjusting suns shadow (outdoor) 80 all fixtures on or off 80 daytime (outdoor) 80 dimming 121 nighttime (outdoor) 80 line style 164 line, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 203 lines, drawing 162 in Fence Designer 174 living room (QuickStart) 95 load bearing walls, specifying 167 locate plant 28 locating PhotoView image 182 lock objects (3D Custom Workshop) 233
H
hallway (QuickStart) 95 handrails (deck) 147 hardiness zone maps 27 heat pump 140 heat/vent lights, dimming 121 heating units, adding 140 height, wall 106 hide cutaway slider 21 hide detection (3D Custom Workshop) 234 hide features in 3D 85 hide Floor Plan Trace image 65 hide layers (3D Custom Workshop) 234 hide plan layers 18, 68 hide tools (Estimator) 186 hip roof 131 home plans, sample 46, 97 homeplans, included 46 hose bib, placing 127 hot water heater 129 how to estimate materials needed 186 How-To Center 10 hvac tab 139
I
identify color or material in 3D 23 identifying which plant has been placed 27 ignore lot boundry 85
log home components 26 lot boundary ignore, restrict 85 Lot Properties 61
M
Managing 3D View Palettes 84 manual activate tool options 8 marker leader dimension 72 master bedroom (QuickStart) 95 master pricelist, creating in Estimator 187 matching apply (3D Custom Workshop) 227 matching scale (Floor Plan Trace) 65 material estimations (Estimator) 186 material importer 47 material, adding (Fence Designer) 176 material, attaching (RealModel) 88 material, printing template (RealModel) 88 materials, apply (3D Custom Workshop) 211 materials, applying 31 materials, find applied 31 materials, search (3D Custom Workshop) 229 mature plants 29 measurement tools 6 measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 73 menu bar 5 mirror (3D Custom Workshop) 237 modifying deck staircases 148 modifying staircases 113 move to back (QuickStart) 95 move to front (QuickStart) 95 move, entire plan 58 moving along the grid 70 along the grid (Fence Designer) 178 ceiling fan 122 features between plans 58 objects 54 objects between floors 57 Photoview image 182 plants 27 sinks 128 multigon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 200 multigon, drawing 163 in 3D Custom Workshop 216 in Fence Designer 175
objects, moving between floors 57 office (QuickStart) 95 offset dimension 72 opacity, in ClearView 79 open arc (3D Custom Workshop) 219 open arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 202 open stairway 113 opening 39 opening a file (3D Custom Workshop) 191 organize decorator palettes 84 organize libraries 36 organizing decorator palettes 84 organizing saved 3D views 85 ornamental iron fence (Fence Designer) 171 ornamental iron fence properties (Fence Designer) 172 orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 239 outdoor cabinet 153 outdoor cabinet hardware, add or remove 153 outdoor hose bib 127 outlets, placing 119 oval (3D Custom Workshop) 215 oval, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 199 ovals, drawing 161 in Fence Designer 174
P
paint 30, 212, 226 pan (3D Custom Workshop) 241 pan tool 18 panning, 2D view 18 parameters, undo 53 paste 54 pathway 154 change width 154 straight or curved 154 pathway/driveway description 154 patio draw 152 edit 152 perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 239 phone jack 122 photograph (PhotoView) 181 PhotoView 181 file format 181 tips for using 181 pi radian (3D Custom Workshop) 207 picket fence (Fence Designer) 171 picket fence properties (Fence Designer) 172 picture of my home (PhotoView) 183 piers, foundation 99 pitch, roof 133 pitch, window 110 placing air ducts 139 bathtubs 128 ceiling and floor outlets 119 gang switch 120 gas bib 127 hose bib 127 hot water heater 129 showers 129 sinks 128 sprinkler heads 158 toilets 128 Plan Full View 89 plan layer, viewing 18, 68 plan tab, selecting 6 plan tabs 6 plan, views 17 planar mapping 228 plane (3D Custom Workshop) 221 plans, customizing visible 18, 68 plant categories 26 plant database 28
N
normal apply (3D Custom Workshop) 227 notations 62 nudge 54 in 3D Custom Workshop 235
O
object description (3D Custom Workshop) 192 object selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 222 object-level editing 165 in Fence Designer 176 objects 25, 47 converting 2D to 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 206 copying 57 copying between floors 57 editing 35 elevating 56 moving 54 moving by coordinates 55 printing (3D Custom Workshop) 193 renaming 35 rotating 55 rotating (3D Custom Workshop) 231, 245 selecting (3D Custom Workshop) 222 specifying 3D size (3D Custom Workshop) 233
257
Index
plant details, edit 27 plant growth meter 29 plant inventory bar 27 PlantFinder 28 plants adding 26 customizing age 27, 63 find by name 28 locate on Preview Bar 28 moving 27 sorting 28 plants, find applied 31 plants, growing 29 plotter 51 plumbing tab 127 point selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 208, 222 point-level editing 165 in Fence Designer 176 polygon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 200 polygon, 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 217 polygons, drawing 162 in Fence Designer 175 pond, adding 154 post tension strand 100 preview bar 8 preview speed, setting (Animator) 81 print 87 print templates (RealModel) 87 printer setup (RealModel) 87 printing 3D View 52 printing drawing in color 51 printing floor plans 51 print to fit page 51 print to scale 51 printing a pricelist (Estimator) 188 floorplans (3D Custom Workshop) 193 priority (QuickStart) 95 privacy fence (Fence Designer) 171 privacy fence properties (Fence Designer) 173 ProjecTape 25 property line 151 pumps (heat), adding 140
Q
Quarter 3D View 89 QuickPalette 32 access 33 active palette 33 apply palette 33 create new palette 34 customize palette 33 delete palette 34 rename palette 34 reset default palette 34 QuickStart 59 second video 91, 97
R
radians (3D Custom Workshop) 207 rafter material, specifying 169 size, specifying 169 spacing, specifying 169 rafter properties 169 rail fence (Fence Designer) 171 rail fence properties (Fence Designer) 173 railings adding 113, 149 modifying 114 RealModel 75, 86 attaching template textures & colors 88 scale 86 recently opened files 46 recessed lights, dimming 121
rectangle (3D Custom Workshop) 215 rectangle, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 199 rectangles, drawing 161 in Fence Designer 174 redo 54 reference grid 69 using (Topo Designer) 245 reflectivity, deck 148 region, fill 151 remove cabinet hardware 116 remove door hardware 109 remove handrails 147 remove outdoor cabinet hardware 153 remove point 165 remove skirt trim 147 remove trim 29 remove wall trim 29 renaming layers (3D Custom Workshop) 235 render final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 239 rendered mode, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 193 rendering options QuickStart 96 rendering styles ClearView 78 framing 78 wireframe 78 replacing PhotoView image 182 requirements, system 3 resetting 2D view 18, 68, 96 reshape add point 165 decks 145 fill 151 flooring 114 remove point 165 resize exterior wall 101 resize, objects 35 resizing bathtubs 129 doors 108 fences (Fence Designer) 176 gates (Fence Designer) 176 PhotoView image 183 railing 149 roofing 133 staircases 148 tubs 129 retaining wall height 158 retaining walls 157 reversing a staircase 113, 148 revolving, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 207 right align text 62 right view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 rim joists, specifying 169 roof cutout 134 roof pitch, change 133 roof slope, change 134 roof trusses 169 roof, generate (QuickStart) 96 roof, resizing 133 roofing tab 131 roofs adding 131 constructing templates (RealModel) 88 gambrel 134, 135 saltbox 136 room addition tool 106 room templates 116 room view 77 rotate 55 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 231, 245 hvac units 141 in Fence Designer 176 walls 105 rotate entire plan 58 rotate, 1-degree 35, 55 rotate, specified amount 55
rotated text 63 rotation origin visible (3D Custom Workshop) 244 rules 164
S
saltbox roof 136 sample plans 46, 97 save 3D view 85 save as 47 saving files 47 scale, defining (RealModel) 86 scale, setting 14, 60 scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 181 scroll mouse zoom 68 search, colors (3D Custom Workshop) 213 search, materials (3D Custom Workshop) 213 second floor, adding 111 selecting in 3D 22 selection filter 71 selection mode, object (3D Custom Workshop) 222 selection mode, point (3D Custom Workshop) 222 selection, rotating 55 send to back 165 in Fence Designer 176 serial number 92 setting a nudge distance (3D Custom Workshop) 235 settings, display 13 shadows, adding 81 show Floor Plan Trace image 65 show QuickStart at startup 91, 97 show tools (Estimator) 186 Show Topography Lines 73 shrubs 26 side grid (3D Custom Workshop) 194 sidewalk 154 sinks 128 size, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 233 skewing objects (3D Custom Workshop) 231 skirt trim (deck), editing 147 skylight 135 slab foundation 100 SmartWand 32 smoke detector 123 snap grid, on and off (3D Custom Workshop) 195, 245 snap options 70 snap to grid, on and off in Fence Designer 178 snap to grid, settings 69 in Fence Designer 178 snap to grid, turning off 70 snaps alignment 71 intersections 70 object center 70 on segment 70 segment center 70 soffit options 103 spacing grid (Fence Designer) 178 spacing, baluster 147 speed tips 13 speed, fly-around 77 speed, walk through 77 Split Plan/3D View 89 split view 20, 75, 89 split view, 2D and 3D 20, 75, 89 square footage, calculating 62 squares, drawing 161 in Fence Designer 174 stack windows 110 staircases modifying 113 placing 112 resizing 148 reversing the direction 113, 148
staircases (deck) customizing 148 modifying 148 placing straight 148 straight 148 stairway landing 113 stairway, open 113 status bar 8 steps, adding 147 steps, changing the height 148 stiffener beams 99 changing length 99 dimensioning 99 straight deck staircase 148 straight edging 155 straight railing 113, 149 straight staircase 112 straight staircases 148 straighten a curved pathway 154 stud spacing 102 support column material 169 support columns (framing) 168 support, technical 11 surface mapping 228 switches, connector 120 symbols, 2D 26 system requirements 3 system settings 13
T
tabs deck plan 145 detail plan 161 electrical plan 119 floor plan 101 foundation 99 hvac 139 landscape plan 151 plumbing 127 roofing 131 technical support 11 template, printing textures 88 template, RealModel wall 87 templates 116 text adding 62 alignment 62 at an angle 63 edit 63 formatting 63 text & dimension toolbar 7 texture, attaching (RealModel) 88 textured (3D Custom Workshop) 239 thermostat 123 three-point freehand roof tool 133 tips & tricks 10 title bar 5 toilets, placing 128 tool options 8 toolbars 6 tools, measurement 6 top view (3D Custom Workshop) 241 topography lines, show 73 tracing, floor plan 65 Training Center 10, 91 translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 239 transparent fill 164 trees 26 trim, remove 29 troubleshooting scroll mouse 68 trusses 169 tubs, placing 128 TurboFloorPlan Home Design installing 3 uses for 3
259
Index
TurboFloorPlan Online Community 11 turn off auto roof generation 131 two colors on one wall 107 two textures on one wall 29
U
undo 53 undo parameters 53 unit of measurement 13, 60 in 3D Custom Workshop 191 update 3D view 85 update room finishes 33 update topography grid 61 USDA zone maps 27
V
vents, placing 140 version number 92 Videos 10 view aerial 77 birds eye 77 View icons 6 view, adding shadows 81 view, adjusting lighting in 3D Custom Workshop 241 view, camera angle 77 view, full plan 75 view, speed 77 view, split 20, 75, 89 viewing elevations in ClearView 78 viewing, 2D plan 17 viewing, all floors 17, 67 viewing, layer combinations 17, 68 viewing, plan layer 18, 68 viewing, working floor 17, 61, 67 viewpoint angle 22 viewpoint reference 76 views 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 196 ClearView (3D Custom Workshop) 239 controlling 17, 59, 67, 75, 89, 91 final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 239 orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 239 perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 239 textured (3D Custom Workshop) 239 translucent (3D Custom Workshop) 239 wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 239 views, fly-around 76 virtual ruler, show or hide 73 visibility (QuickStart) 95 visual array tool 34 VRML, exporting to 51
rotating 105 slanted 105 walls tab (QuickStart) 95 walls, constructing templates (RealModel) 87 wall-spacing dimensions 72 watch plants grow 29 wheel mouse zoom control 68 window callouts, on and off 102 window dimensions, hiding 73, 102 window molding 29 window pitch 110 window, 3D View 75 window, elevate 110 window, grill settings 110 window, stack 110 windows 109 arranging 75 wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 239 wireframe, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 193 wireframe, render 78 Wolfgang Trost Architects 46 working elevation, setting 57 working floor button 6 working floor, viewing 17, 61, 67 working in groups (3D Custom Workshop) 233 workshop object, resize 35
Z
zero-offset dimension 72 zoom (3D Custom Workshop) 241 zoom factor 17, 68, 96 zoom tool 17, 68 zoom, setting the factor 17, 68, 96 zoom, troubleshooting wheel mouse 68 zooming in 2D 17, 68
W
wainscot, remove 29 wainscotting 29 walk-through adjusting elevation 76 speed 77 view 76 wall break tool 107 wall options 102 wall properties (framing) 167 wall trace deck 145 wall trim, remove 29 wall width 102 walls 101 defining height 106 exact length exterior 101 irregular 105 retaining 157 retaining height 158
261
Index
263
Index
265
Index
267
Index

Turbo Floor Plan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Turbo Floor Plan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turbo Floor Plan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Users Guide

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Part 1: Nuts & Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Part 2: Menu Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Part 3: From the Ground Up . . . . . . . . 93

Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

ii TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

141 141 142 142

Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Part 4: Enhancement & Customization PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Drawing 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Part 5: 3D Custom Workshop . . . . . . 189

Drawing 2D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

iv TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

vi TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

viii TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Nuts & Bolts

Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7:

TurboFloorPlan Installation DVD

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

4 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Training Center view icons tool options preview bar

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Selecting a Plan Tab

Working Floor Button

6 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Text & Dimension Toolbar

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

8 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once.

Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once.

Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice.

About This Guide

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

To access the online help files

On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.

Tips & Tricks

10 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

12 TurboFloorPlan Users Guide

Before You Draw

Important System Settings